Manual Lantek - Expert Punch

Module

i
Lantek Punch module

Table Of Contents
1 CAD MODULE - PUNCHING 1
1.1 Parts 4
1.1.1 New 5
1.1.2 Open 5
1.1.3 Save 5
1.1.4 Save as 7
1.1.5 Save by parts 7
1.1.6 Save all 8
1.1.7 Return to the main screen 9
1.1.8 Nesting and machining 9
1.1.9 Preview 9
1.1.10 Print 10
1.1.11 Exit 11
1.2 Geometry 12
1.2.1 Points 13
1.2.2 Segments 15
1.2.3 Polylines 18
1.2.4 Arcs 21
1.2.5 Circles 26
1.2.6 Lines 33
1.2.7 Squares 37
1.2.8 Polygons 38
1.2.9 Rectangles 40
1.2.10 Modified rectangles 41
1.2.11 Obround slots 43
1.2.12 Radial slot 45
1.2.13 Pulleys 47
1.2.14 Ovals 47
1.2.15 Ellipses 48
1.2.16 Offset 48
1.2.17 Fitting 49
1.3 Edit 50
1.3.1 Undo 51
1.3.2 Delete geometry 51
1.3.3 Lengthen elements 52
1.3.4 Join elements 53

ii
Lantek Punch module

1.3.5 Break elements 53

1.3.6 Chamfering in corners 57
1.3.7 Fillets 57
1.3.8 One touch figures 58
1.3.9 Move 59
1.3.10 Stretch 60
1.3.11 Rotate 61
1.3.12 Scale 62
1.3.13 Place near 63
1.3.14 Mirror 63
1.3.15 Copy 64
1.3.16 Break parts 65
1.3.16.1 Break parts by equal parts 66
1.3.16.2 Break parts by middle parts 66
1.3.16.3 Break parts by defined geometry 67
1.3.17 Transform one-touch figures 68
1.3.18 Punching geometry 69
1.3.19 Change co-ordinates 70
1.4 Machining 71
1.4.1 Initialize 72
1.4.2 Rapid 73
1.4.3 Contours in drawing (punching) 73
1.4.4 Simple cycle 75
1.4.5 Linear sequence 78
1.4.6 Circular cycle machining 79
1.4.7 Grid machining 82
1.4.8 Nibblings 83
1.4.9 Pockets 86
1.4.10 Punching macros 87
1.4.10 Punching macros 88
1.4.10.1 Rectangular pocket by means of two points 90
1.4.10.2 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's nibbling with micro-joints. 90
1.4.10.3 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on two sides 91
1.4.10.4 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on four sides 91
1.4.10.5 Rectangular hole with stop/trap 91
1.4.10.6 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's pocket 91
1.4.10.7 Circular pocket with square tool 92

iii
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10.8 Circular hole with micro-joints 92

1.4.10.9 Circular hole with stop/trap 92
1.4.10.10 Rectangular one-touch figure on corner 92
1.4.10.11 Rectangular one-touch on side 92
1.4.10.12 One-touch figure on V on the end 92
1.4.10.13 Complete one-touch figure on V 93
1.4.10.14 Circular nibbling with micro-joints 93
1.4.10.15 Linear nibbling with micro-joints 93
1.4.10.16 Linear nibbling by means of two points 93
1.4.10.17 Nibbling in terms of steps 93
1.4.10 Import 94
1.4.11.1 Import geometry of the part 94
1.4.11.2 Import machining of a part 94
1.4.11.3 Import machining of a macro 94
1.4.11.4 Geometry of a tool 94
1.4.11.5 Geometry of a DXF file 95
1.4.11.6 Geometry of a DWG file 95
1.4.11.7 Parametric Parts 95
1.4.11.8 Image vectorization 95
1.4.12 Automatic machining in drawing mode 96
1.4.12 Modify (Machining parameters in drawing mode) 97
1.4.13.1 Microjoints 98
1.4.13.2 Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour 98
1.4.13.3 Order machining 99
1.4.13.3.1 Order machining by punches 99
1.4.13.3.2 Order machining by punches manually 99
1.4.13.3.3 Order machining in angles 99
1.4.13.3.4 Order machining in paths 100
1.4.13.3.5 Order punch sequence 100
1.4.13.4 Modify punch cycles 101
1.4.13.4 Modify punch cycles 102
1.4.13.4.1 Reverse structures 102
1.4.13.4.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns 102
1.4.13.4.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns 103
1.4.13.4.4 Change the initial point of grid structures (Modify punch cycles) 103
1.4.13.4.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures 104
1.4.13.4.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures 104

iv
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.4.7 Delete stroke on patterns 104

1.4.13.5 Modify nibble cycles 105
1.4.13.5.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value 105
1.4.13.5.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value 106
1.4.13.5.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point 106
1.4.13.5.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point 107
1.4.13.5.5 Reverse nibble cycle 107
1.4.13.5.6 Break nibble cycle 108
1.4.13.5.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance 108
1.4.13.5.8 Join nibble cycles 109
1.4.13.5.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles 109
1.4.13.5.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble 110
1.4.13.5.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble (Modify nibble cycles) 111
1.4.13.5.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots 111
1.4.13.5.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble 112
1.4.13.5.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles 112
1.4.13.6 Modify pockets 113
1.4.13.7 Modify punch instruction 114
1.4.13.8 Explode all 114
1.4.13.9 Explode by selection 115
1.4.13.10 Regenerate 115
1.4.13.11 Regenerate by selection 116
1.4.13.12 Replace punches 116
1.4.13.13 Replace one punch with other 116
1.4.13.14 Replace one punch with other respecting the geometry 117
1.4.13.15 Cancel punchings from a punch 117
1.4.13.16 Delete duplicate punches 117
1.4.13.17 Modify Lead-in/outs 117
1.4.13.18 Modify head management of rapids 117
1.4.13.19 Transform machining 118
1.4.13.20 Copy machining 119
1.4.13.21 Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble moves 120
1.4.13.22 Modify movements 120
1.4.13.23 Move simple punch 121
1.4.13.24 Slide simple punch 121
1.4.13.25 Retract clearance in punches 121
1.4.14 Optimizing machining (punching) 122

v
Lantek Punch module

1.4.15 Delete machining 122

1.5 Technology 124
1.5.1 Speed rates (cutting) 125
1.5.2 CN compensation 126
1.5.3 System compensation 126
1.5.4 Tools 126
1.5.5 Turrets 127
1.5.6 Fix punch order 127
1.5.7 Tolerance in nibblings 127
1.5.8 Work chutes 128
1.5.9 Chute assignment 129
1.5.10 Box assignment 129
1.5.11 Postprocessor words 130
1.5.12 Change cutting direction 130
1.5.13 Contour ordering 131
1.5.14 Micro-joints 131
1.5.15 Loops 134
1.5.15 Bridges 135
1.5.16.1 Opened bridge 135
1.5.16.2 Closed bridge 135
1.5.16.3 Delete bridges 136
1.5.16.4 Automatic bridges 136
1.5.16.5 Configure bridges 136
1.5.17 Punch technology 137
1.5.17.1 Micro-joint 1 138
1.5.17.2 Micro-joint 2 138
1.5.17.3 Micro-joint 3 139
1.5.17.4 Micro-joint 4 139
1.5.17.5 Micro-joint 139
1.5.17.6 Shear 139
1.5.17.7 Common punch 140
1.5.17.8 No common punch 140
1.5.17.9 Mark texts by technology 141
1.5.17.10 Automatic 141
1.5.17.11 Delete 142
1.5.18 Delete technology 142
1.6 View 142

vi
Lantek Punch module

1.6.1 Orthogonal F2 143

1.6.2 Axis 143
1.6.3 Bitmap 143
1.6.4 Snap modes 144
1.6.5 Simulation speed 147
1.6.6 Text / dimensions 147
1.6.7 Zoom window 147
1.6.8 Zoom scale 148
1.6.9 Zoom base 148
1.6.10 Previous zoom 148
1.6.11 Zoom all 149
1.6.12 Zoom dynamic 149
1.6.13 Full screen 150
1.6.14 Redraw 150
1.6.15 Run 151
1.6.16 Sheet simulation 151
1.6.17 Current turret 152
1.6.17.1 View - Current Turret 152
1.6.17.2 View - System status - Current turret 153
1.6.17.3 Machining - Modify - Allow tools to be moved if required 153
1.6.18 Settings (Configure Draw and Nest - General ) 153
1.6.19 Toolbars 161
1.7 Simulation 161
1.7.1 Program 162
1.7.2 ISN Position 162
1.7.3 Mouse positioning 163
1.7.4 Next 163
1.7.5 Previous 163
1.7.6 Begin 164
1.7.7 End 164
1.7.8 Next tool 165
1.7.9 Previous tool 165
1.7.10 Next reposition 166
1.7.11 Previous reposition 166
1.8 Utilities 167
1.8.1 Texts 167
1.8.2 Vectorize texts 168

vii
Lantek Punch module

1.8.3 Dimension notes 169

1.8.4 Time and cost 173
1.8.5 Distance and angles 173
1.8.6 Angle between three points 174
1.8.7 Verify part 175
1.8.8 View geometry 176
1.8.9 Compare geometries 178
1.8.10 Define limits 178
1.8.11 View system status in drawing 178
1.8.11.1 Active tool 178
1.8.11.2 Used tools 179
1.8.11.3 Current turret 179
1.8.11.4 Current status (punching) 180
1.8.11.5 Verify the machining 180
1.8.11.6 Show machining of a tool 181
1.8.12 Select Machine 182
1.8.13 Duct holes 182
1.8.14 Machining macros 183
1.8.15 Remnants 183
1.8.16 Parametrics 184
1.8.17 Customize 185
1.9 Applications 187
1.9.1 Partial cut of a contour 188
1.9.2 Pallet 188
1.10 ? 188
1.10.1 Contents 188
1.10.2 Context 189
1.10.3 User editor 189
1.10.4 About 189
2 CAM MODULE - PUNCHING 191
2.1 Jobs 193
2.1.1 Open 194
2.1.2 Next 194
2.1.3 Previous 194
2.1.4 Save 194
2.1.5 New part 195
2.1.6 Main program 195

viii
Lantek Punch module

2.1.7 Go to the drawing module 195

2.1.8 Print /Preview 196
2.1.9 Exit 197
2.2 Nesting 197
2.2.1 Do all 198
2.2.2 Active subjob 198
2.2.3 One sheet 198
2.2.4 One window 199
2.2.5 Modules 202
2.2.6 Fitted 204
2.2.7 Move parts in the nesting 204
2.2.8 Place near 206
2.2.9 Adjust nesting to the sheet 210
2.2.10 Copy parts 210
2.2.11 Delete parts in nesting 215
2.2.12 Collision control 216
2.2.13 Import 216
2.2.14 Export 219
2.3 Sheets 220
2.3.1 New 220
2.3.2 Go to 223
2.3.3 Next 223
2.3.4 Prevoius 223
2.3.5 Delete 223
2.3.6 Unblock 224
2.3.7 Delete every part 224
2.3.8 Change data 224
2.3.9 Change quantity 225
2.3.10 Remnants 226
2.3.10.1 Remnant line (manual) 227
2.3.10.2 Remnant line (Draw the exact edge) 228
2.3.10.3 Remnantline (automatically) 229
2.3.10.4 Delete remnant line 230
2.3.10.5 Generate automatic remnant 231
2.3.10.6 Delete remnant 231
2.3.10.7 Remnant reference 232
2.3.10.8 Rotate remnant 234

ix
Lantek Punch module

2.3.10.9 Sheet Remnants 234

2.3.12 View CNC 239
2.4 Machining 239
2.4.1 Initialize 240
2.4.2 Rapid 240
2.4.3 Contours 241
2.4.3.1 Contours in nesting and machining (punching) 241
2.4.3.1.1 Punch/Cut set of selected parts 242
2.4.3.1.2 Machining inside in automatic mode 243
2.4.3.1.3 Punching outside in automatic mode 245
2.4.3.1.4 Edging by nibbling 246
2.4.3.1.5 Edging by extraction 247
2.4.3.1.6 Edging by pocketing 248
2.4.3.1.7 Total edging 248
2.4.3.1.8 Machining inside in manual mode 249
2.4.3.1.9 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch 249
2.4.3.1.10 Punch outside in manual mode 250
2.4.3.1.11 Extractions of machined parts 251
2.4.3.1.12 Finish off the corners 256
2.4.3.1.13 Punch remnants line 257
2.4.3.1.14 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode 258
2.4.3.1.15 Punch the whole work zone 259
2.4.3.1.16 Punch vertical outside in manual mode 260
2.4.3.1.17 Punch horizontal outside in manual mode 261
2.4.3.1.18 Machining scrap line 262
2.4.3.2 Punching with shear 262
2.4.3.2.1 Machining inside in automatic mode 263
2.4.3.2.2 Shearing outside in automatic mode 265
2.4.3.2.3 Edging with the shear 266
2.4.3.2.4 Finishing the side 266
2.4.3.2.5 Shearing to the band 267
2.4.3.2.6 Shearing to the bottom part 268
2.4.3.2.7 Shearing the lower band 269
2.4.3.2.8 Evacuating of the lower band 269
2.4.3.2.9 Machining inside in manual mode 269
2.4.3.2.10 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch 270
2.4.3.2.11 Finish off the corners 271

x
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.2.12 Machining scrap line 272

2.4.3.2.13 Shearing in manual mode 272
2.4.3.2.14 Shear one part 273
2.4.3.2.15 Punch shear references 273
2.4.3.2.16 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode 273
2.4.3.2.17 Punch the whole work zone 275
2.4.4 Simple cycle 275
2.4.5 Automatic machining in nesting mode 277
2.4.6 Modify 278
2.4.6.1 Modify Microjoints 279
2.4.6.2 Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour 281
2.4.6.3 Delete microjoints 282
2.4.6.4 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value 282
2.4.6.5 Order machining in nesting 283
2.4.6.5.1 Put tools in order manually 283
2.4.6.5.2 Order machining by distances only 284
2.4.6.5.3 Order by distances and angles 284
2.4.6.5.4 Order punch sequence 284
2.4.6.5.5 Order cutting sequence 285
2.4.6.5.6 Order punch sequence semi-automatically 286
2.4.6.5.7 Order cut sequence 287
2.4.6.5.8 Order punch sequence by window 288
2.4.6.6 Move special texts 289
2.4.6.7 Modify punch cycles 289
2.4.6.7.1 Reverse structures 290
2.4.6.7.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns 290
2.4.6.7.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns 290
2.4.6.7.4 Change the initial point of grid structures 291
2.4.6.7.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures 291
2.4.6.7.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures 292
2.4.6.7.7 Delete stroke on patterns 292
2.4.6.8 Modify nibble cycles 292
2.4.6.8.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value 293
2.4.6.8.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value 293
2.4.6.8.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point 294
2.4.6.8.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point 294
2.4.6.8.5 Reverse nibble cycle 295

xi
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.6 Break nibble cycle 295

2.4.6.8.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance 295
2.4.6.8.8 Join nibble cycles 296
2.4.6.8.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles 296
2.4.6.8.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble 298
2.4.6.8.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble 298
2.4.6.8.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots 298
2.4.6.8.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble 299
2.4.6.8.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles 299
2.4.6.9 Modify pockets 300
2.4.6.10 Explode all 301
2.4.6.11 Explode by selection 301
2.4.6.12 Regenerate 302
2.4.6.13 Replace one punch with other 302
2.4.6.14 Modify data of machine initialization (Punching) 303
2.4.6.14.1 Startup 303
2.4.6.14.2 Place the clamps with the keyboard 307
2.4.6.14.3 Place the clamps with the mouse 308
2.4.6.14.4 From Point 308
2.4.6.14.5 Move the from point interactively 309
2.4.6.14.6 Sheet Data 310
2.4.6.14.7 Upload / Download sheets 311
2.4.6.14.8 Punching parameters 314
2.4.6.14.9 General machine options 319
2.4.6.14.10 Tool properties 322
2.4.6.14.11 Postprocessor data 323
2.4.6.15 Do not pass over the clamps 323
2.4.6.16 Labels treatment 323
2.4.6.17 Subprograms treatments 323
2.4.6.18 Delete machining of selected parts 325
2.4.6.20 Modify chute operation 326
2.4.6.21 Delete chute operation 326
2.4.6.21 Modify Lead-in/outs 326
2.4.6.23 Modify the head management 329
2.4.6.24 Delete every head up/down instruction 332
2.4.6.25 Modify head management of rapids 332
2.4.6.26 Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble moves 332

xii
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.27 Apply alternate strokes on all the exterior cycles and nibble moves 333
2.4.6.28 Modify movements 333
2.4.6.29 Modify compensation 333
2.4.6.30 Modify the compensation of a contour 335
2.4.6.31 Quality dependent compensations 336
2.4.6.32 Avoid hits with form tools 336
2.4.6.33 Delete machining of selected parts 337
2.4.6.34 Modify the reposition point 338
2.4.6.35 Modify the zero point of the sheet 338
2.4.6.36 Retract clearance in punches 338
2.4.7 Optimize machining (punching) 339
2.4.8 Delete machining 339
2.5 Technology 340
2.5.1 Speed rates 341
2.5.2 Turrets 341
2.5.3 Tolerance in nibblings 341
2.5.4 Reposition 342
2.5.5 Sheet turn over 342
2.5.6 Work chutes 343
2.5.7 Chute assignment 344
2.5.8 Box assignment 345
2.5.9 Punch attributes 345
2.5.10 Postprocessor words 346
2.6 View 346
2.6.1 Orthogonal 347
2.6.2 Parts list 347
2.6.3 Snap modes 349
2.6.4 Simulation speed 352
2.6.5 Zoom window 352
2.6.6 Zoom scale 353
2.6.7 Previous zoom 353
2.6.8 Zoom all 354
2.6.9 Zoom dynamic 354
2.6.10 Redraw 355
2.6.11 Full screen 356
2.6.12 Run 356
2.6.13 Sheet simulation 356

xiii
Lantek Punch module

2.6.14 Settings (Configure Draw and Nest - General ) 357

2.6.15 Toolbars 364
2.7 Simulation 365
2.7.1 Program 366
2.7.2 ISN Position 367
2.7.3 Mouse positioning 367
2.7.4 Next 368
2.7.5 Previous 368
2.7.6 Begin 369
2.7.7 End 369
2.7.8 Next tool 370
2.7.9 Previous tool 370
2.7.10 Next reposition 371
2.7.11 Previous reposition 371
2.8 Utilities 372
2.8.1 Time and cost 372
2.8.2 Distances and angles 373
2.8.3 Angle between three points 373
2.8.4 View geometry 374
2.8.5 Special display 375
2.8.6 View system status in nesting 375
2.8.6.1 Active tool 376
2.8.6.2 Used tools 376
2.8.6.3 Current turret 377
2.8.6.4 Current status (punching) 377
2.8.6.5 Clamps and work zone 377
2.8.6.6 System efficiency 378
2.8.6.7 Verify the machining 378
2.8.6.8 Show machining of a tool 379
2.8.7 Configure (cutting) 380
2.8.7.1 Part rotations 381
2.8.7.2 Assign boxes to parts 381
2.8.7.3 Sheet parameters 382
2.8.7.4 Process punches out of the part 384
2.8.7.5 Automatic nesting 384
2.8.7.6 Do all - Automatic nesting 388
2.8.7.7 Automatic machining 390

xiv
Lantek Punch module

2.8.7.7.1 Horizontal exterior punched 390

2.8.7.7.2 Vertical exterior punched 391
2.8.7.7.3 Edge punching 392
2.8.7.7.4 Shearing 395
2.8.7.7.5 Nested punch configuration 415
2.8.7.7.6 Component Removal 432
2.8.7.7.7 Reposition 439
2.8.7.8 Part List Table 445
2.8.8 Customize 446
2.9 Application 448
2.9.1 Assign paletization suction cups 448
2.9.2 Assign download point to pallet 448
2.9.3 Avoid to destroy from tool hits when punching the outside 449
2.9.4 Pallet 449
2.10 ? 449
2.10.1 Contents 449
2.10.2 Context 450
2.10.3 User editor 450
2.10.4 About 450

xv
Lantek Punch module

1 CAD MODULE - PUNCHING

Introduction

The 2D design module is a powerful application which provides multiple different tools for design
any type of part in two dimensions. It offers a wide range of drawing possibilities. For example,
there are more than 10 different ways of drawing a circumference.

As a sheet-metal oriented CAD module, it counts with specific tools which allows to make
complex part details in an easy way (one-touch figures, chamfers, fillets, etc.)

To access the drawing module, from the Edit menu choose the Drawing option or push the

corresponding button (it is not necessary to have a manufacturing order open to enter this
module).

Drawing window

The drawing window occupies the center of the 2D design screen and represents the useful
drawing zone where the design of the part can be carried out:

1
Lantek Punch module

Status bar

The status bar continually provides information on the coordinates of the cursor (on the right) and
the actions that can be performed (on the left). This is very useful whenever an option is carried
out in different steps, since it informs you of the actions to be performed at each stage.

For example, when the cursor is placed over a button, the status bar shows information about the
action this button will execute.

Quantity of equal sheets to be done: when the system detects that the same sheet has to be
machined twice, it will send the same CNC code twice to the machine. In that case, this number
will indicate the number of times that this CNC code is going to be executed.

Sheets dimension: those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet

Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the nested
parts.

2
Lantek Punch module

Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, is the size that the nested parts occupied in the
remnant. In the example the value is the same as previous one because all the sheet is being
used, not only a remnant.

Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will arrive.
For example: although the loaded sheet is 4000x2000, with a 3658x1980 sheet is enough for
cutting all the parts.

Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.

CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file which will not be generated until the job is saved.

1.1 Parts

1.2 Geometry

1.3 Edit

14 Machining

1.5 Technology

1.6 View

1.7 Simulation

1.8 Utilities

1.9 Applications

1.10 ?

Main button bar

Drawing buttons

3
Lantek Punch module

Machining buttons

1.1 Parts

1.1.1 New

1.1.2 Open

1.1.3 Save

1.1.4 Save as

1.1.5 Save by parts

1.1.6 Save All

1.1.7 Main program

1.1.8 Nesting and machining

1.1.9 Preview

1.1.10 Print

1.1.11 Exit

4
Lantek Punch module

1.1.1 New

This option enables you to create a new part. If the current changes has not been saved, the
system will warning it.

1.1.2 Open

This option enables to open a part from the current manufacturing order. It will show a list with
information about the available parts:

Reference Quant. Machine Material Thick. Labor-

ticket
DXFPAR10 1 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 1
CUT
DXFPAR11 57 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 2
CUT
DXFPART0 5 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 3
CUT
DXFPART1 1 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 4
CUT
DXFCUT2 5 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 5
CUT
DXFPAR11- 57 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 6
1 CUT
DXFPAR11- 57 Lantek ST-37 0,8000 7
12 CUT

1.1.3 Save

This option enables to save the changes made in a part. Once a new part has been created or an
existing part modified, any changes made must be saved before exiting by using this option.

If it is a part that already existed, when it is saved the system not will request any information, but
if is a new part, then the user must specify some parameters:

Part reference (e.g. Circle222)

5
Lantek Punch module

This is the name the system will show every time this part is referred.

Assigned machine (e.g. Lantek Cut Iso...)and material (e.g. ST-42) with the specified
thickness (e.g. 0,8000)

One job is composed of all the parts which are going to be processed in the same machine with
the same material and thickness. Here, the user can check to which job the part belongs.

Date (e.g. 20/06/2002)

This parameter stores when the part has been created.

Quantity (e.g. 25)

This is the amount of parts that needs to be machined in the job. Near this data, the system will
also display the pending and nesting quantities.

Priority

The user can assign a priority for placing the parts on the sheet. The higher the priority value is,
the system is going to try to place them first.

Customer, Order number, Plan number, Labor ticket, Order, Product

This is complementary data that the user can specify and will be stored in the database.

More button

Using this button, the system will show more data which can be stored with the part (commission,
delivery time, supplier, transporter, comment):

Rotations: When the part enters into the nesting process, it contains information about the
position in which it can be placed, this can be configured when saving using the check boxes:

6
Lantek Punch module

If this parameter i.e. It is a filler part is enabled, then the system will place this part only when the
others have been already nested on the sheet.

Also if this parameter i.e. It is to fill in hollows is enabled, then this part will only be placed inside
other part's holes.

The only difference lies in the option Automatic nesting (See page XXXXX)since a new sheet is
never opened if there are only filler pieces left.

1.1.4 Save as

This option enables to save the changes made in a part. It is similar to the option Save (See page
XXXXX). The only difference is that when using the Save as option for a part that already exists,
the system will ask for data, just like when saving a new part. In this way, if the part already exists
you can create other part by making any desired changes and assigning it another name, but
maintaining the original as is. And also it allows the user to overwrite it.

1.1.5 Save by parts

The user can design more than one part at once in the drawing module. This option allows to
save each part independently as if they were drawn alone.

And also if the entered reference/automatically generated already exists, the system does not
show an error message, it informs the user that there is already a part in the database with this
reference and it allows the user to overwrite it.

Detect parts automatically

7
Lantek Punch module

The system will test each contour finding different parts in the whole drawing area. Each time a
part is found, it will be saved.

Ask data for each part: Enabled, the system will prompt for the data of each found part. Disabled,
the system will ask only for the data of the first found part, and then will apply the same
configuration for all the parts just adding the found order number into the part's reference. For
example, if giving to the first part the reference "LANT", then the reference of the next found parts
will be: "LANT-1", "LANT-2", etc.

But if Detect parts automatically is disabled, then the system will prompt for the contours of each
part to be saved. For example, with the following two parts:

Repeat this process for all the needed parts.

Delete the part: If this option is enabled, then the system will delete all the geometries of the part
just after saving it. This is useful when there are many parts drawn and the user wants to be sure
that all of them have been saved properly.

1.1.6 Save all

This option enables to save all the parts and jobs.

8
Lantek Punch module

1.1.7 Return to the main screen

This option allows to return to the main screen without closing the drawing module. If there is any
change, the system will ask the user if he wants to save the changes before returning to the main
screen.

If later, the user goes to the drawing module, the last drawing will appear. To abandon the
drawing module by closing it see option Parts - Exit (See page XXXXX).

1.1.8 Nesting and machining

This option enables to go to the Nesting punching and cutting module. Clicking on this button
when in the drawing module will exit the module without closing it.

If any changes have been made the system asks whether you want to save the changes before
going to the nesting and cutting screen. If you then return to the drawing module, the last drawing
carried out will appear. If you want to leave and close the drawing module see the option Parts -
Exit (See page XXXXX).

The Nesting Module (See page XXXXX).

1.1.9 Preview

The system will show a preview of how the current part will be printed if using the Print option. It
will show the part as bigger as possible, and different information like: Machine, Material,
Thickness, Dimensions, etc.

9
Lantek Punch module

1.1.10 Print

This option enables to print a part. The use can see what is going to be printed exactly with the
Parts - preview (See page XXXXX) option of the menu.

A report will be sent to the default printer . The following fields, referring to the current part, will
appear on the report:

- Bitmap, part reference, order it belongs to, client, order observations, current date and time.

In the center section, the drawing of the part will be printed, followed by another series of fields:

- Machine used, material, thickness, order number, drawing number, commission, terminal date,
supplier, carrier, measurements, anticipated quantity, quantity manufactured, maximum rectangle
weight, external weight, real weight, length of cut, length of stamping and date of part creation.

10
Lantek Punch module

The stamps are different for each machine and those to be used can be specified in Utilities -
Configure: Machines - General properties (See page XXXXX).The stamps which appear in this
report are expressible as parameters: line thicknesses, drawing position and size, text format and
database fields.

To define a new stamp, contact the Support Team.

1.1.11 Exit

This option enables to leave of the drawing module and to return to the main module.

See also Return to main screen (See page XXXXX) and Go to Nesting and cutting module. (See
page XXXXX).

11
Lantek Punch module

1.2 Geometry

1.2.1 Points

1.2.2 Segments

1.2.3 Polylines

1.2.4 Arcs

1.2.5 Circles

1.2.6 Lines

1.2.7 Squares

1.2.8 Polygons

1.2.9 Rectangles

1.2.10 Modified Rectangles

1.2.11 Obround slots

1.2.12 Radial slots

1.2.13 Pulleis

1.2.14 Ovals

1.2.15 Ellipses

1.2.16 Offset

1.2.17 Fitting

12
Lantek Punch module

1.2.1 Points

The points can be used:

1. As auxiliars for drawing another geometries

2. Executing a cycle
In the Points toolbar, click the desired button for help:

Point: The system will draw a small cross which determines the point. It can be drawn using
the mouse and the Snap modes (See page XXXXX), or just typing the coordinates in the
keyboard.

Moved point: It draws a point taking as base one existing point and giving the displacement
which can be done in Cartesian or Polar coordinates:

Rotated point: From a center and regarding to a selected point, the user can draw another
point with different angle:

13
Lantek Punch module

In this case, the drawn point will be at 25 degrees from the initial point respect to the center point:

Symmetric point: This option allows to draw a point which is symmetric to a given one
respect an axis which is defined by two points:

14
Lantek Punch module

Projected point: The system will project the selected point respect to the chosen element. In
the example the user can see the difference between one or other projection element selection:

1.2.2 Segments

When using this option, the system shows the Segments toolbar. Click the desired button for
help:

Segment by two points

The segment will be determined by two given points. Please, be sure you are using the proper
Snap mode (See page XXXXX) for capturing the points:

Segment by point and tangent

This option will draw a segment from the given point tangent to the selected circle or arc:

15
Lantek Punch module

Segment tangent to two elements

The segment will be tangent to two given circles or arcs:

Segment parallel to other a given distance

The segment will be parallel to other segment the given distance in the specified position:

Segment parallel to other passing from a point.

16
Lantek Punch module

The segment will be parallel to other and will pass from a given point:

Segment perpendicular to one element passing from a point

Starting from a given point and selecting a perpendicular element, the system will draw a
segment:

Segment perpendicular to one element and one specific length

In this case, the segment will be perpendicular to a given element in the selected position,
passing from a point and at specific length from the perpendicular element:

17
Lantek Punch module

1.2.3 Polylines

This tool allows to draw multiple joined lines by a common point. In the Polylines toolbar, click the
desired button for help.

It is important to understand that the polyline option can be changed in the drawing module
allowing to use for each point the best option.

Polyline by points

The first polyline option allows to draw lines just giving points. It is important to know that the
points can be captured with the mouse or with the keyboard typing the coordinates like on the
following example:

18
Lantek Punch module

The polyline will end when pressing the "ESC" or "ENTER" keys.

Polyline by points referred from other point

The system will catch points at a distance of selected points for drawing the polylines. The way of
define polyline points is: selecting the base point and giving the displacement for each one. In the
example the two base points are the same, and the first point is at X-100 distance, and the
second at Y-60 distance, the join of both build the polyline:

19
Lantek Punch module

Polyline defined by points rotated respect other point

In this case, the way of capturing polyline points is selecting a rotation point, a point and giving
the displacement angle. In the example the user can see how the first polyline point has been
defined:

Polyline defined by points symmetrics to others

This option will define the polyline using points symmetrics to other points respect to an axis. To
see how to capture these points, see Geometric - Points - Symmetric point (See page XXXXX).

Polyline defined by projected points

The used points will be get using the technique explained in Geometric - Points - Projected point
(See page XXXXX).

Link arcs in the line

This option allows to include an arc into current polyline:

20
Lantek Punch module

Close the line with a segment

When drawing the polyline if clicking on this button, the system will join the first given point with
the last one with a segment:

1.2.4 Arcs

These are the options of the Arcs toolbar which allows to draw arcs with 10 different modes, click
on the button for help:

Arc by three points

The system will draw the arc which pass over three defined points:

Arc defined by two points and center

The system will draw the arc which pass over two points respect to given center point in the
specified sense:

21
Lantek Punch module

Arc defined by the center, beginning point and angle step

The arc will be defined by the center, one beginning point and one angle between the beginning
and the calculated end point:

Round arc of a corner

The system will calculate the arc which pass for two tangent elements with the specified radius:

22
Lantek Punch module

Arc defined by two points and the radius

The arc will be defined by two given points and the radius, the system will calculate the center:

Arc defined by the radius, and the beginning and step angles

The arc will be calculate with the given radius, and beginning and step angles:

23
Lantek Punch module

Arc defined by the center, the beginning point and perimeter

In this case, the system needs two points: the center and beginning ones, and the total length of
the perimeter of the arc:

Arc defined by two points of its diagonal

The arc will be defined by two points from the diagonal:

24
Lantek Punch module

Broken arc defined by three points

With three given points the system will calculate if is possible to define an arc which pass over
them. The difference with the first option is that in this case, there is one parameter, Break
tolerance, which will determine in how many segments the arc is going to be divided:

The Break tolerance value in this case is 0.5, this means that the real arc geometry and the
discretized into segments one will never be separated at higher distance that 0.5 mm.

Transform a segment to an arc with a radius

25
Lantek Punch module

From a given segment, the system will try to convert it to an arc with the given radius and center
position:

In this case, the system allows to break the arc into small segments for getting a better result.
The final geometry is going to be an arc but composed by small segments. In the following
example, the user can see the result if the Break tolerance parameter was enabled:

Continuous arc

This option allows the user for drawing arc tangent to an element in any of its limits and the end
point of the arc.

1.2.5 Circles

The system provides 16 different geometric methods for drawing a circle. The Circles toolbar
presents all the options,

Click on the desired button for help:

26
Lantek Punch module

Circle defined by center and radius

The circle will be drawn with the given center coordinates and typed radius:

Circle defined by one point and center

The system needs to know the center of the circle and one point:

Circle defined by three points

The circle will pass over three given points:

27
Lantek Punch module

Circle tangent to two elements and with one specific radius

In this option, the circle will be tangent to two given elements and with the typed radius:

Circle concentric to other

The circle will be concentric to other existing circle or arc with the given radius:

Circle tangent to three elements

Taking three elements, the system will draw the unique circle which is tangent to them:

Circle tangent to one element with one specific center

28
Lantek Punch module

From one element and the coordinates of the center, the system will draw the circle tangent to the
element using the center:

Circle defined by two points and a specific radius

The circle will pass over two given points with the typed radius:

Circle defined by one point, radius and tangent to an element

This circle will be tangent to the selected element, pass over one point with the specified radius:

29
Lantek Punch module

Circle tangent to two elements passing through one point

The system will draw a circle tangent to two selected elements passing over one given point.

Circle concentric to other defining the difference between radius

For drawing the circle, the user must select one existing circle or arc, and input the difference of
radius that will have the new circumference with the selected element:

Circle tangent to one element passing through two points

This option will draw a circle which will pass over two given points and is tangent to the selected
element:

30
Lantek Punch module

Convert an arc to a circle

The clicked arc will be converted into a circle:

Circle on corners defining the distances to the edges

The circle will be drawn in the specified corner with center at the input distances to each one:

31
Lantek Punch module

Circle define by two points of its diagonal

By entering two points, the system will draw the circle whose diagonal pass over them:

Circle defined by center and its diameter

32
Lantek Punch module

1.2.6 Lines

The straight lines are used as auxiliary geometries which supports complex constructions. The
following is the Lines toolbar, select one of the 14 provided options for help:

Line defined by one point and angle

The line will be drawn with the given point and angle:

Line defined by two points

The line will be defined by two given points:

Horizontal line defined by a point

The system will draw an horizontal line which pass over the given point:

33
Lantek Punch module

Vertical line defined by a point

In this case, the line will be vertical passing over the clicked point:

Line parallel to one element at a specific distance

This line will be parallel to a selected element the given distance:

Line parallel to one element passing through a point

In this case, the line will be parallel to other element and will pass over the given point:

34
Lantek Punch module

Line perpendicular to one element passing through a point

The system will draw, if possible, a perpendicular line to selected element which will pass through
the fiven point:

Line tangent to one element passing through a point

The line will pass over a given point and is going to be tangent to the selected element:

Line tangent to two elements

In this case, selecting two elements will make the system to draw the line tangent to them:

35
Lantek Punch module

Line symmetric to segment or other line

Selecting one element and defining an axis will make the system to draw the symmetric:

Line tangent to one element and with a specific angle

The line will be defined being tangent to one element and with an angle:

Bisector line

This option will draw the bisector line of two joined segments:

36
Lantek Punch module

Perpendicular bisector line

The line will be the perpendicular bisector to the segment formed by the two given points:

Convert segment to a line

Using this option the user can convert one existing segment into a line:

1.2.7 Squares

This option enables to draw a square. There are two different options for making this:

Square defined by its lower-left corner

37
Lantek Punch module

This first option will draw a square from the given point as lower-left corner, and the typed angle
and side length:

Square defined by its center

In this case, the given point will be the center of the square, then the user must input the angle
and the side length:

1.2.8 Polygons

The system provides 3 different tools for drawing polygons. The Polygons toolbar presents all the
options, click on the desired button for help:

Polygon defined by its side length

38
Lantek Punch module

Starting from the center point and giving the number of sides and the length of them will make the
system to draw the polygon:

Polygon defined by the radius of the inscribed circle

In this case, the system will draw the polygon referred to the given point as center, with the given
number of sides and getting the radius of the inscribed circle for calculating the length of sides:

In the following scheme, the inscribed circle has been drawn to make the previous example
clearer:

Polygon defined by the radius of the circumscribed circle

This last option allows to define the polygon by the center, number of sides and the radius of the
circumscribed circle:

39
Lantek Punch module

The following is the circumscribed circle which corresponds to the previous example:

1.2.9 Rectangles

This drawing choice supports three modes for defining a rectangle:

Rectangle defined by its lower-left corner

The given point will be the lower-left corner of the rectangle, then the system needs the angle and
the lengths of two sides:

Rectangle defined by its center

40
Lantek Punch module

In this case, the given point will define the center of the rectangle. Then, the user must input the
angle, the length and the width:

Rectangle defined by two points

The last option allows to draw the rectangle which pass over two points:

1.2.10 Modified rectangles

This drawing choice allows to draw rectangles with special corners. Click on the desired option of
the toolbar for help:

The way of drawing is the same as with the normal rectangles. The difference comes depending
on the selected corner type and radius:

41
Lantek Punch module

These are the explanation for making the rectangles which are going to be drawn with the
selected corner type with the given radius:

Rectangle defined by its lower-left corner

The given point will be the lower-left corner of the modified rectangle, then the system needs the
angle and the lengths of two sides:

Rectangle defined by its center

In this case, the given point will define the center of the rectangle. Then, the user must input the
angle, the length and the width:

42
Lantek Punch module

Rectangle defined by two points

The last option allows to draw the rectangle which pass over two points:

1.2.11 Obround slots

With this drawing option the user can define obround slots. There are three different options in
the obround slots toolbar, click on the desired one for help:

Obround slot defined by one point and angle

The system needs one point, the angle and the length/width values for drawing the obround slot:

Obround slot defined by its middle point and angle

In this case, the obround slot will be defined using the given point and the typed angle:

43
Lantek Punch module

Obround slot defined by two points

In this case, the system will get the two given points as arc centers and the distance between
them as obround slot length:

With this drawing option the user can define Linear grooves (Obrounds). There are three different
options to do this kind of geometries.

- Linear groove defined by one point and one angle

- Linear groove defined by middle point and one angle

- Linear groove defined by two points.

To create the linear groove with any of these 3 options the user needs to define the length and
the width. The length was measured using the arc center points.

44
Lantek Punch module

The 3 options are the same as the previous ones but using as length the distance between two
extremes (middle point of the arcs) of the groove.

1.2.12 Radial slot

The Circular slot toolbar shows four different possibilities. Select the desired one for help:

Radial slot defined by beginning and end points, and center

From the first given point to the second one the system will draw a radial slot referred to the given
center point and with the typed width:

Radial slot defined by beginning point, center and angle

45
Lantek Punch module

In this case, the radial slot will be defined with two points: beginning and center, and with the
given angle step:

Radial slot defined by beginning and end points, and center

Using two points as radial slot's begin and end, and with the given center the system will draw the
radial slot.

Radial slot defined by its center, and beginning and step angles

From one given point as center, the system will draw the radial slot defined from the typed
beginning and step angles with the radius value:

46
Lantek Punch module

1.2.13 Pulleys

This option enables to draw a pulley. The system will go asking for circle centers and radiuses
until the first circle center is clicked again. The correct steps are:
1. Click on the button corresponding to pulley.

2. Select the center. point of a circle.

3. The system will ask for the value of the radius, enter the value.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until selecting all the circles to be included in the pulley.

5. To finish select the center. point of the first circle created.

1.2.14 Ovals

This option enables to draw an oval. The system needs some data for defining an oval: the
distance between the two centers, the angle and long and short radius:

47
Lantek Punch module

1.2.15 Ellipses

This option allows to draw an ellipse defined by the angle, the length of larger and shorter axis,
and the number of tracts:

1.2.16 Offset

This option enables you to repeat the indicated contour at a distance from the original contour
you specify. Enter the drawing module (See page XXXXX) and then:
1. Select a contour.

2. Indicate on which side of the initial contour the compensated copy is to be drawn.

3. Indicate the distance between the original and the copy.

48
Lantek Punch module

1.2.17 Fitting

This option enables you to create a fitting type curve, starting form the indicated original contour.
Enter the drawing module (See page XXXXX) and then:
1. Select Geometry/Fitting.

2. Indicate the contour that you want to operate on.

With this parameters the user can define four option, they are:

1. By points

2. Smooth: With this option the user can configure the following parameters, they are: Minimum
number of elements, Maximum number of elements, Maximum radius & Tolerance.

3. Make tangent: With this option the user can configure the following parameters, they are:
Minimum angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius error tolerance &
Position error tolerance

4. Smooth and make tangent: This option includes all the parameters of Smooth and Make
tangent

These sub option allows to make tangents all the elements of a contour. the user will be able to
use both options "Smooth" and "Make tangent" consecutively:

- If after “Smooth” option, from a clicked point, is possible to select a contour in the same point,
then the option “Make tangent” will be executed.

- If after “Smooth” option, the contour has changed and it is not possible to find another contour
in the same point, then the “Make tangent” will not be executed.

After executing both options, if the customer wants to “Undo”, he will have to do it in two steps
(first undo “Make tangent” and second undo “Smooth”).

With this option, the user will be able to select the desired geometry with any of the following
options: Selecting an Element, Window-Capture, Trap, Join, Contour, All and Invert selection.

49
Lantek Punch module

1.3 Edit

1.3.1 Undo

1.3.2 Delete geometry

1.3.3 Lengthen elements

1.3.4 Join elements

1.3.5 Break elements

1.3.6 Chamfer

1.3.7 Fillet

1.3.8 One-touch figures

1.3.9 Move

1.3.10 Stretch

1.3.11 Rotate

1.3.12 Scale

1.3.13 Place near

1.3.14 Mirror

1.3.15 Copy

1.3.16 Break parts

1.3.17 Transform One-touch figures

1.3.18 Punching geometry

1.3.19 Change co-ordinates

50
Lantek Punch module

1.3.1 Undo

This edit option allows to go back to previous states of the drawing. It is a powerful option which
enables to make several operations with the safety of knowing that everyone can be deleted
immediately.

For example, clicking on this button will delete the last drawn element, if it is pressed again the
previous element will disappear and so on successively.

Note: There are some actions that, once carried out, cannot be undone.

The number of operations that can be undone is configured in Configure Draw and Nest - Auxiliar
section (See page XXXXX).

1.3.2 Delete geometry

Using this option the user can delete geometries from the design. The first step is to select the
geometries to delete using the selection button bar (See page XXXXX). When all the elements
have been selected, the next step is to validate the selection with the right button of the mouse, or
using the Accept button of the selection button bar, or pressing the <Intro> key. All the selected
elements will be removed from the current drawing.

Multiple elements can be selected at the same time. In the following example, the auxiliary points
and lines will be deleted from the part:

51
Lantek Punch module

1.3.3 Lengthen elements

With this option you can connect two elements, lengthening one or both. Unlike joining elements
(See page XXXXX), it does not delete any part of the two elements in question:

52
Lantek Punch module

1.3.4 Join elements

This option allows the user to join two element of the drawing, forming a corner with the area of
the selected element. Joining is performed as follows: the opposite extremes of the selected
elements are erased:

1.3.5 Break elements

This option allows the user to split elements without eliminating the parts that limit a base element
and contiguous elements. The different options are:

Selecting one element, it requests a point where the element will be split, without eliminating
both elements. If it is a line, it will request a second point and will make up a segment with the two
selected elements, eliminating the rest:

Once the base element is determined, it eliminates till the intersection the area of the second
element which intersects with the first:

53
Lantek Punch module

Starting from the selected base element, eliminates until the intersection, the selected areas
of the second elements which intersect with the first:

Eliminates the selected and intermittently marked area from two intersectioning elements:

Eliminates the area of an element located between two intersections:

54
Lantek Punch module

Splits two elements and attaches them using a bridge of the requested width. The attachment
will take place in the selected area of the elements:

Joins two elements using their exterior contours and deleting interior ones:

Makes the substract of two elements. It keeps the exterior of the first element and continues
with the intersections with the second element:

55
Lantek Punch module

It will use the intersection contours and delete the rest:

Shorten or lengthen elements the given value. Once clicking on one element, the system will
ask for the operation to perform. For example, if clicking on the following element:

Select base contour

The result will be different depending on the selected options. First, if using Shorten:

If the selected option is Lengthen:

Join and fillet two crossed elements with the given radius:

56
Lantek Punch module

1.3.6 Chamfering in corners

Places a chamfer on a vertex. A request is made for the separation distance between each of the
elements. Once the option is selected follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See
page XXXXX) in the lower part of the screen:

1.3.7 Fillets

Rounds a vertex. A request is made for the radius of the arch that the system uses to round the
vertex. Once the option is selected follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See
page XXXXX) in the lower part of the screen:

57
Lantek Punch module

1.3.8 One touch figures

This option is similar to chamfers option but now it is easier to configure because the system asks
both dimensions for the chamfer in the same panel. But the user has to activate the "Constrain
proportions".

If this option is active, the system will make that both dimensions to be updated together and
keeping the proportions between them (The proportion ratio will be the one defined when the user
activates this option). This is similar for the "Rectangular one-touch figure on a corner" option.

Also this option enables the application of different types of notches on drawn parts.

The system will request the data required to define each type of notch:

Once the lengths have been entered, the system needs to know the elements where the notch is
going to be drawn, and, sometimes, the position.

The value typed in notches options will be stored for the next execution.

The following is an example of one-touch figure application:

58
Lantek Punch module

1.3.9 Move

This option allows to move a part of the drawing. Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the geometry to be moved. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may be of
assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select a point of reference.

5. If the selected geometry is to be rotated, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX), or
click on the right button of the mouse and hold it down while rotating with the mouse.

6. Select the insert point.

7. Click on the left button of the mouse.

59
Lantek Punch module

1.3.10 Stretch

With this option it is possible to modify a shape by stretching. It only applies to more than one
element if those chosen make up a closed outline. The effect will be the same as moving the
shape (See page XXXX) chosen. To stretch:
1. Select the elements to stretch or modify.

2. Select the point of reference, the one you will move.

3. Move the selection to the destination point.

4. Select the destination point.

The two extremes of the chosen shape will remain fixed and the point of reference will move:

60
Lantek Punch module

1.3.11 Rotate

This option enables you to rotate a part of the drawing. Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the geometry to be rotated. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may be of
assistance.

2. Repeat the step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select the rotation center.

5. Select one of the following types of rotation:

Rotate the angle as desired.

Rotate until the rectangle formed by the vertexes (X-minimum, Y-minimum), (X-minimum, Y-
maximum), (X-maximum, Y-minimum) and (X-maximum, Y-maximum) of the part selected has
the minimum area.

61
Lantek Punch module

Rotate all the selected part until one of its elements (the one which you select as auxiliary)
has the desired angle. First indicate the angle and then select the straight line or auxiliary
segment.

For example:

1.3.12 Scale

This option enables you to enlarge or to reduce a part of the drawing. Change the real
dimensions of the elements selected in the proportion indicated. Once the option is selected
follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the
screen:
1. Select the geometry to scale. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may be of
assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select the base point of the scale.

5. Type the value of the scale.

62
Lantek Punch module

1.3.13 Place near

This option works in exactly the same way as Attach parts (See page XXXX). The only difference
is that one option deals with elements and the other with parts. Therefore everything explained in
Attach parts (See page XXXX) applies to Attach elements, the only difference being that one
case involves parts and the other, elements.

1.3.14 Mirror

This option enables you to copy a part of the drawing symmetrically about an axis or indicated
straight line. Once the option is selected follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See
page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the geometry to copy in symmetry. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may
be of assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select the axis, straight line or symmetry segment.

63
Lantek Punch module

1.3.15 Copy

This option enables to copy a part of the drawing. Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the geometry to be copied. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may be of
assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select one of the following types of copy:

Makes a single copy.

Makes several copies to any places desired.

Makes a given number of copies (n), on a straight line with an angle a, maintaining a
distance d between the copies.

Makes a given number of copies (n), on a circumference, maintaining an angle a between

the copies. If the Rotation parameter is Yes the selected geometry will be rotated to the same
angle corresponding to its position within the circumference. If it is No, the geometry will not be
rotated. See how the drawing changes by selecting one or another option.

Makes a copy in the form of a matrix. Each position of the matrix will contain a copy.

n1: Number of columns.

n2: Number of lines.
a: Rotation angle of the matrix.
d1: Distance between columns.
d2: Distance between lines.

64
Lantek Punch module

Makes all the copies that fit in a user defined rectangle.

Makes all the copies that fit in a user defined rectangle, but whose bottom left corner is the
part to be copied.

This option makes to copy geometries and machining. Copy inside a contour according to
the direction and offsets.

The geometry/machining is copied in the selected directions, as many times as possible inside its
contour, taking into account the offset entered (separations between each copy, in X and Y).

It is possible to select one or various directions for the copy by clicking any of the arrows in the
drawing:

By clicking on the center, all the directions are selected/deselected, if they are active.

1.3.16 Break parts

This option enables you to split a part in different ways.

1.3.15.1 Equal parts

1.3.15.2 Middle points

1.3.15.3 Defined geometry

The user can indicate the type of seam desired for the corners where the parts have been cut.
This will serve to join the parts after cutting. One of the parts will have a male seam and the other
a female. If the parts are not to be joined after cutting them, do not assign a seam.

65
Lantek Punch module

1.3.16.1 Break parts by equal parts

Splits the part into parts whose lengths or widths are equal. Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the two sides of the part to be split apart.
The following steps are to position each of the parts that have been generated upon splitting
the part:

2. To rotate the cut part that is selected, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX) ,or click
on the right button of the mouse and hold it down while rotating with the mouse.

3. Select the insert point.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each cut part.

5. The cut parts will be saved as separate parts. In the Save parts dialogue that is displayed
enter the data for the newly generated parts (See Parts: Save (See page XXXX)). This data
will be the same for all the parts, except the name; each part is to be assigned the name
indicated in the Save parts dialogue followed by a separating character (-) and a number that
will be different for each part.

1.3.16.2 Break parts by middle parts

Splits the part through the middle point of the selected elements. Once this option is selected
follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the
screen:
1. Select the elements whose mid-points are to split the part. The selection button bar (See
page XXXX) may be of assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar and the
part will be split through the mid-point of the selected elements.

The following steps are to locate each of the parts that have been generated upon splitting
the part:

66
Lantek Punch module

4. To rotate the cut part that is selected, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX), or click
on the right button of the mouse and hold it down while rotating with the mouse.

5. Select the insert point.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each cut part.

7. The cut parts will be saved as separate parts. In the Save part dialogue that is displayed
enter the data for the newly generated part (See Parts: Save (See page XXXX)). This data
will be the same for all parts, except the name; each part will be assigned the name
indicated in the Save part dialogue followed by a separating character (-) and a number that
will be different for each part.

1.3.16.3 Break parts by defined geometry

Splits the part by the selected elements. Once the option is selected follow the instructions that
appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the elements which are to split the part. The selection button bar (See page XXXX)
may be of assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar and the
part will be split by the selected elements.

The following steps are to place each of the parts generated by splitting the part:

4. To rotate the cut part that is selected, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX), or click
on the right button of the mouse and hold it down while rotating with the mouse.

5. Select the insert point

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each cut part.

7. The cut parts will be saved as separate parts. In the Save part dialogue that is displayed
enter the data for the newly generated part (See Parts: Save (See page XXXX)). his data will
be the same for all the parts, except the name; each part will be assigned the name
indicated in the Save part dialogue followed by a separating character (-) and a number that
will be different for each part.

67
Lantek Punch module

1.3.17 Transform one-touch figures

This option is only useful for combinated machines where the punch of one-touch figures can be
done by using the cutting head.

And this option will only appear if the option "Cut the one touch figures while outside punching" is
active. This can be configured from the work centers module for combinated machines.

Transform in

For example, with the following one-touch figure:

If applying the transform one-touch figures technique with the Open contours option, the system
will convert the two lines of the one-touch figure with non-cut technology, and will generate an
open contour which will be cut by the laser or plasma of the combinated machine instead of
punching. The following is a zoom of the resulting one-touch figure:

The dark blue is the normal exterior which will be punched by the horizontal and vertical external
tools, and the yellow line will be machined by the cutting head.

68
Lantek Punch module

If using the Holes option, then the result is:

One interior hole has been created, and the two exterior segments are lengthen until the
intersection with non-cut technology. This is useful for the system to perform the machining of the
one-touch figure as a normal hole, and then the exterior will be made with the cutting head.

If the user wants to perform all the exterior machining of the part less the one-touch figures with
the cutting head, this is the best option.

Mode

With this parameter the user select two option

1. By parts

2. By selection : With this option "transform one touch figures" in holes and/or open contours
allow to select which notches will be transformed

1.3.18 Punching geometry

This option gets the resultant geometry from a group punch strokes. The options are:

-All punches

-The whole geometry

-Geometry of the trace on infinite sheet

69
Lantek Punch module

-Geometry of the trace on rectangular sheet

These two last options allow checking how the sheet may be after punch it. If there is any free
piece the system will detect it and will draw it in blue.

This option is also valid for marking and form tools geometry.

1.3.19 Change co-ordinates

The coordinate system can be changed for making easier the part's designs. There are 8 options
in the Coordinates toolbar:

Move the coordinate system to a point

With this option the user can change the system coordinate to the selected point. In other words:
the 0,0 point will be the clicked one.

Rotate the coordinate system by an element

The system will prompt for a base element, and then the coordinate system will rotate respect to
it.

Rotate the coordinate system an angle

The coordinate system will rotate the given angle.

Symmetry on axis X

Every time this option is selected, the coordinate system will be mirrored respect to the X axis.

70
Lantek Punch module

Symmetry on axis Y

In this case, the symmetry will be respect to the Y axis.

Symmetry on axis XY

The coordinate system will be mirrored on both axis.

Make the actual coordinate system by default

If this button is pressed, the system will take the current coordinate system as the default one
every time the CAD module is open.

Restore the default coordinate system

This option will change current coordinate system into the default one which can be established
with the previous option.

1.4 Machining

1.4.1 Initialize

1.4.2 Rapid

1.4.3 Goto

1.4.4 Contours

1.4.5 Simple cycle

1.4.6 Linear cycle

1.4.7 Circular cycle

1.4.8 Grid cycle

71
Lantek Punch module

1.4.9 Irregular cycle

1.4.10 Import

1.4.11 Automatic

1.4.12 Modify

1.4.13 Optimize

1.4.14 Copy

1.4.15 Delete instructions

1.4.1 Initialize

Initializes the machining. This operation must be done always before making any machining
operation. When the button has been pressed, the system performs several operations which
make possible to start the use of the machine:
• Apply the settings configured on machine's startup configuration section (See page XXXX).

• Place the clamps as configured on machine's sheet clamps configuration section (See page
XXXX).

• Initialize the work zone as set up on machine's work zone configuration section (See page
XXXX).

• Initialize the from-point as configured on the from-point configuration section (See page
XXXX).

• The system will show the upload/download configuration if enabled on machine's

upload/download sheets configuration section (See page XXXX).

72
Lantek Punch module

• Apply the configured punching parameters (See page XXXX) (for punching machines) or the
cutting parameters (See page XXXX) (for cutting machines)

• Apply the general machine options (See page XXXX).

When using any of the automatic machining options, the system will begin always with the
initialize process.

1.4.2 Rapid

A Rapid movement is a displacement of the head without cutting. Using this option, the user can
insert a rapid movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point (clicking with
the mouse or using the keyboard for giving the coordinates):

The system will go inserting rapid movements to the prompted points until the ESC key is
pressed.

1.4.3 Contours in drawing (punching)

This option permits the machining of the drawing, depending on the selected option. Once the
option is selected, press OK and follow the instructions in the status bar, in the bottom side of the
screen.

Manual contours

73
Lantek Punch module

This option allows the user to decide if the punching contours will be generated as macros or not.
If the contour is close and there is any evacuation asigned (STOP, TRAP, Lift), the machining of
the contour will be generated as a macro automatically.

In this case, is the user who has to go selecting the contours which are going to be cut with the
active tool:

Automatic holes with the active tool

The system will go machining with the active tool the holes the user selects:

Automatic holes

74
Lantek Punch module

The work way of this option is the same as with the previous option. But in this case, is the
system who decides which is the best tool to use on every clicked hole.

Automatic simple

This option will make the automatic punching of the holes that only need a single punch:

Shearing in manual mode

Using this option the shear can be used:

The shear will hit in the selected point.

The system needs a reference segment, then the point of the hit. For example, if the
reference segment is vertical, then the point can only be of X position (it can only move along this
axis).

The shear hit will be the intersection point of the two selected segments

1.4.4 Simple cycle

After the tool has been selected, the user can choose between four different types of using it for a
simple cycle operation:

75
Lantek Punch module

This option allows to punch at any point or, if the tool is rounded, in the center of a circle:

This option will adjust always the hit to the nearest contour to the clicked point:

This option will perform a centered punching. The user will have to select the element
and then define which side of the element is going to be punched. The system will center the hit
in the segment:

This type of cycle will make the system to perform the hit to the nearest side of the
segment to the clicked point.

76
Lantek Punch module

The user must select the segment but knowing that the hit will be done from the nearest side of
this point:

This will insert a punch tangent to two elements.

The user must select both segments in which the punching will be tangent. This option can only
be performed with round punches:

NOTE: For not-rounded punches, the user can rotate the selected tool in any direction (see
rotation buttons bar). Then, when asking for tool placement in the turret, is important to place it in
a station which allows to work in the selected angle:

Adjusted to two elements: This option allows the user to make a punch stroke tangent to
two segments which are not joined. The system will internally enlarge both segments to get a
correct internal geometry (the real geometry will not be modified).

The system allows to use only Round punches.

77
Lantek Punch module

1.4.5 Linear sequence

With this option you can perform a linear centre-punching sequence starting from a point and
the following dialogue box:

n : Number of centre-punches in the sequence

a : Angle at which the line of centre-punches will be made with respect to the horizontal.

d : Distance between centre-punches in the sequence.

With this option you can perform a centre-punching sequence starting from two points
(beginning point and last point in the sequence) and the following dialogue box:

n : Number of centre-punches in the sequence.

78
Lantek Punch module

With this option you can perform a centre-punching sequence starting from three points:
beginning point, second point and last point in the sequence. Keep in mind that with this option
the distance between centre-punches is determined between the first and second point, and that
if the third point is not at a distance which is an exact multiple of that between the first and second
points, the cycle will not be done. In the example, only the first is a clicked point, for the rest we
input the coordinates:

1.4.6 Circular cycle machining

With this option you can perform a circular centre-punching sequence starting from the center
of the sequence and the following dialogue box:

r : Radius of the sequence.

n : Number of centre-punches in the sequence.

a : Angle between centre-punches in the sequence.

ai : Initial angle of the first centre-punch in the sequence.

79
Lantek Punch module

With this option you can perform a centre-punching sequence starting from two points: the
center and the first centre-punch, and the following dialogue box:

n : Number of centre-punches in the sequence.

a : Angle between centre-punches in the sequence.

80
Lantek Punch module

With this option you can perform a circular centre-punching sequence starting from three
points: beginning point, second point and last point in the sequence. Keep in mind that with this
option the distance between centre-punches is determined between the first and second point,
and that if the third point is not at a distance which is an exact multiple of that between the first
and second point an error message will appear. In the example, the Quadrant Point has been
used as snap mode (See page XXXX):

With this option you can perform a circular centre-punching sequence by selecting an arc and
indicating the number of centre-punches in the sequence using the following dialogue box:

n : Number of centre-punches in the sequence.

81
Lantek Punch module

1.4.7 Grid machining

With this option the user can create a grid of cycles:

Grid of cycles starting from one point and inserting the following data:

n1 : Number of centre-punches along the x-axis.

n2 : Number of centre-punches along the y-axis.

a: Angle of grid with respect to the horizontal (angle of x-axis).

d1 : Distance between centre-punches on the x-axis.

d2 : Distance between centre-punches on the y-axis.

For example:

Grid cycle by five points: origin, first in X, last in X, first in Y and last in Y.

Keep in mind that the last point on each line must be at a distance which is an exact multiple of
that between the first and second point on each axis.

82
Lantek Punch module

For making the example easier, the points have been already drawn when selecting this option in
the following coordinates:

The distances from the initial point to the destination points in X and Y axis must be multiple of
the distances between the initial points and the first and second points:

1.4.8 Nibblings

This option allows to insert nibblings into the machining process. In order to do this, the user must
select an element and then the desired side:

83
Lantek Punch module

Then, the system allows to enter the offsets to use knowing that negative values will make the
nibbling to go out from the contour the given value, and positive just the opposite:

The way the nibbling will be performed also depends on the Technology - Toler in nibbling
parameters.

With this option the user can define the circular nibblings. the available option are:

-Control of the punch side on the corners

-Control of the punch center on the corners

These value are only asked when punching arcs with square, rectangular, obround, banana and
triangular tools (two and three radius).

And also the user can create slots and pockets with or without defined geometry, they are:

-By geometry.

84
Lantek Punch module

-Lineal: 2 points.

-Lineal: Initial point, length and angle.

-Circular: Center, radius, initial angle and step.

-Circular: Center, point and angle step.

Simple punching operation

When user select the "By Geometry" a new window displayed through which the user can
configure simple punches at linear nibblings option in geometry.

If in the selected geometry to perform a linear nibbling was not possible to place a single stroke,
the system displayed a message and the punch was not performed.

There are two possibilities:

Adjust to the geometry depending on the clicked point/ Not make the machining and give an error
message (any of the sides or centered).

Adjust automatically the punch with collision control.

This option tests if a microjoint is going to be destroyed, if so a warning will be displayed or the
punch will be adjusted to any side in order to not destroy it.

This parameter has three option, they are:

-Show an error if it is not possible to place them.

-Fitting dependent of the picked point

-Automatic position.

Use the longest tool segments for nibblings [ON/OFF] and Use the [n] longest segment

85
Lantek Punch module

This option is used for linear nibblings, this option allows the user to select the segment of the
punch to do the nibbling. By default the longest segment is selected. With this new parameter it is
possible to select the second , third and eleventh longest segment (valid for rectangular,
triangular or form punches).

By deactivating the first parameter the system shows a second new option. This parameter have
been also added in the version 24.10 (updating the latest service pack).

1.4.9 Pockets

This option allows the user to hollow round square and rectangular contours This option can only
be used with round, square and rectangular punches. The user should select just one element of
the contour to hollow:

To create slots and pockets with or without defined geometry.

- By geometry.

- Rectangular: 2 points.

- Rectangular: point, length, width and angle.

- Rectangular: center, length, width and angle.

- Circular: center end point.

- Circular: 2 diagonal points.

- Circular: center and radius.

86
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10 Punching macros

The machining macro are used for making the machining of a contour in automatic mode.
Previously, the user has to select the tool the machining is going to be executed with.

1.4.10.1 Rectangular pocket by means of two points

1.4.10.2 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's nibbling with micro-joints.

1.4.10.3 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on two sides

1.4.10.4 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on four sides

1.4.10.5 Rectangular hole with stop/trap

1.4.10.6 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's pocket

1.4.10.7 Circular pocket with square tool

1.4.10.8 Circular hole with micro-joints

1.4.10.9 Circular hole with stop/trap

1.4.10.10 Rectangular one-touch figure on corner

1.4.10.11 Rectangular one-touch figure on side

1.4.10.12 One-touch figure on V on the end

1.4.10.13 Complete one-touch figure on V

1.4.10.14 Circular nibbling with micro-joints

1.4.10.15 Linear nibbling with micro-joints

1.4.10.16 Linear nibbling by means of two points

1.4.10.17 Nibbling in terms of steps

87
Lantek Punch module

There are three different options for creating a macro manually:

The system will show the list of instructions where the user can choose all the lines
which are going to build the macro.

By selecting two points the user can create a punch macro instruction. These two
points must be the center of the elements from the machining sequence, which delimit the init and
end of the macro.

The system will show the list of tools used in the current part and will create a macro
with all the machining of the selected tool.

The user can delete a punch macro instruction by selecting one point inside a
macroinstruction. This point must be the center of the element from the machining sequence,
which delimits the init and end of the macro.

Verifies the machining macros and if there is one without beginning or end
instructions, the system will place them. This may happen when the user deletes accidentally the
instruction from the Instruction List.

1.4.10 Punching macros

The machining macro are used for making the machining of a contour in automatic mode.
Previously, the user has to select the tool the machining is going to be executed with.

1.4.10.1 Rectangular pocket by means of two points

1.4.10.2 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's nibbling with micro-joints.

88
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10.3 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on two sides

1.4.10.4 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on four sides

1.4.10.5 Rectangular hole with stop/trap

1.4.10.6 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's pocket

1.4.10.7 Circular pocket with square tool

1.4.10.8 Circular hole with micro-joints

1.4.10.9 Circular hole with stop/trap

1.4.10.10 Rectangular one-touch figure on corner

1.4.10.11 Rectangular one-touch figure on side

1.4.10.12 One-touch figure on V on the end

1.4.10.13 Complete one-touch figure on V

1.4.10.14 Circular nibbling with micro-joints

1.4.10.15 Linear nibbling with micro-joints

1.4.10.16 Linear nibbling by means of two points

1.4.10.17 Nibbling in terms of steps

There are three different options for creating a macro manually:

The system will show the list of instructions where the user can choose all the lines
which are going to build the macro.

89
Lantek Punch module

By selecting two points the user can create a punch macro instruction. These two
points must be the center of the elements from the machining sequence, which delimit the init and
end of the macro.

The system will show the list of tools used in the current part and will create a macro
with all the machining of the selected tool.

The user can delete a punch macro instruction by selecting one point inside a
macroinstruction. This point must be the center of the element from the machining sequence,
which delimits the init and end of the macro.

Verifies the machining macros and if there is one without beginning or end
instructions, the system will place them. This may happen when the user deletes accidentally the
instruction from the Instruction List.

1.4.10.1 Rectangular pocket by means of two points

This macro hollows a rectangular area defined by two points.

1.4.10.2 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's nibbling with

micro-joints.

With this option will ask the number and the width of the microjoints for the X and Y axis. If the
number of microjoints defined for the user for each axis I bigger than the maximum available, the
system will recalculate it.

Mode: In this option there are two possible ways:

- Equal length nibble: Nibblings of equal length will be used, with microjoints between them.

90
Lantek Punch module

- Simple punch on the ends : This method only makes sense when two or more microjoints are
going to be placed in any of the edges in the rectangle. A simple blow will be made in each of the
ends of the edge, followed by a Microjoint. In the center of the edge, equal length nibblings will be
made, separated by microjoints.

Even if we try to make more microjoints than possible in a given edge, this option will
automatically reduced the number of microjoints.

1.4.10.3 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on two sides

This macro makes a rectangular hole leaving two microcuts on two sides of the rectangle. The
user will select an element of the rectangle to be cut and next he will insert the value of the
microcuts. The microcuts will be located on the chosen element to select the rectangle and in the
element parallel to this one.

1.4.10.4 Rectangular hole with micro-joints on four sides

This macro is equal to the previous one but this one leaves microcuts on each side of the
rectangle.

1.4.10.5 Rectangular hole with stop/trap

This macro is equal to the previous one, but instead of microcutting, it stops to remove the
machined rectangle.

1.4.10.6 Rounded or chamfered rectangle's pocket

This macro is equal to the previous four options,

By geometry

Rectangular: 2 points

Rectangular: Point, Length, Width and Angle

Rectangular: Center, Length, Width and angle

91
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10.7 Circular pocket with square tool

This macro is equal to the previous two options,

-By geometry.

-Circular: center and point.

-Circular: 2 diagonal points.

-Circular: center and radius.

1.4.10.8 Circular hole with micro-joints

This macro makes a round hole with microcuts. The user will select a round element to be
machined and next he will insert the value and number of microcut he wants. This option can only
take place using round punches.

1.4.10.9 Circular hole with stop/trap

This macro makes a round hole and stops to removed the machined round element. The user will
select the round element to be cut. This option can only take place using round punches.

1.4.10.10 Rectangular one-touch figure on corner

This macro makes rectangular notches in a corner. The user will select the two elements of the
corner to be notched. This option can only take place using square and rectangular punches.

1.4.10.11 Rectangular one-touch on side

This macro makes rectangular notches in one side. The user will select the three elements of the
side to be notched. This option can only take place using square and rectangular punches.

1.4.10.12 One-touch figure on V on the end

This macro makes V-shape notches between two elements, but just in the vertex of the V. The
user will select the two elements which are part of the V. This option can only take place using
triangular punches.

92
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10.13 Complete one-touch figure on V

This macro is equal to the previous one but in this case the notching of the two elements which
form the V also takes place. The user will select the two element forming the V shape. This option
can only take place using triangular punches.

1.4.10.14 Circular nibbling with micro-joints

This macro makes round groovings with microcuts. The user will select the round element to be
grooved and next he will invert the value and number of microcuts.

1.4.10.15 Linear nibbling with micro-joints

This macro makes linear groovings with microcuts. The user will select the linear element to be
grooved and next he will insert the value and number of the microcuts.

Also the user will be able to configure the number of microjoints, their width, the offset at both
sides of the nibbling and the kind of nibbling:

1.4.10.16 Linear nibbling by means of two points

This macro makes linear groovings between two points. The user will select two points and next
he will decide, using the following dialogue, what kind of grooving he wants: on one side, the
other side or over the line.

1.4.10.17 Nibbling in terms of steps

This macro makes linear nibblings in terms to the step the user inserts.

93
Lantek Punch module

1.4.10 Import

1.4.10.1 Geometry of a part

1.4.10.2 Machining of a part

1.4.10.3 Machining macro

1.4.10.4 Geometry of a tool

1.4.10.5 Geometry of a DXF file

1.4.10.6 Geometry of a DWG file

1.4.10.7 Parametric parts

1.4.10.8 Image vectorization

1.4.11.1 Import geometry of the part

This option allows the user to import the geometry of a part into current design. It will show the
database divided into the groups for making easier the localization. Once the part has been
selected, the system will prompt for the point to paste it.

1.4.11.2 Import machining of a part

This is similar to import geometry of a part (See page XXXX), but in this case the machining
process associated to the part to be selected is also imported.

1.4.11.3 Import machining of a macro

With this option you can import an existing machining macro (See page XXXX).

1.4.11.4 Geometry of a tool

Using this option, the user can import the geometry of an existing tool into the current design.

94
Lantek Punch module

1.4.11.5 Geometry of a DXF file

The system is able to import the existing geometry of a DXF file into the current design. For
making it, select the proper DXF file and give the insertion point.

1.4.11.6 Geometry of a DWG file

The system is able to import the existing geometry of a DWG file into the current design. For
making it, select the proper DWG file and give the insertion point.

1.4.11.7 Parametric Parts

Using this option, the user can import existing parametric parts into the current drawing. The
parametric parts are stored in Expert/ Param folder.

1.4.11.8 Image vectorization

Using this option, the user is allowed for vectorizing the images with BMP, TIFF, JPEG, PCX,
TGA, GIF,… formats to geometry and import that geometry into the system.

The main parameters of this importer are:

Threshold: The vectorizer converts the color image into a black and white image (Processed
image), using the Threshold configuration parameter (Value between 0-255). If Automatic
threshold is activated, the system calculates this value in automatic, otherwise the user can
change this value and check which is the black and white image with each value (Activating
Processed Image or deactivating Simulate drawings).

Uprigthness: This parameter is for monitoring the precision of the vectorized image. If this value is
very small, the precision is bigger but the number of segments will be also bigger. With a value
equal to zero the precision is at pixel level.

Recognize circles: If you activate this parameter the system can generate arcs while vectorizing
the image.

95
Lantek Punch module

Others: With this button we can configure another vectorizing method (Central Line) and its
configuration parameters. This other method can be useful when the image is formed by lines
instead of a image with different color forms.

The vectorizer can be executed from the importers or from the drawing module

1.4.12 Automatic machining in drawing mode

With this option the system will machine the part depending on the options configured in the
automatic machining section of the cutting (See page XXXX) / punching (See page XXXX)
machine configuration:

96
Lantek Punch module

The system provides different options for modifying the machining (See page XXXX).

1.4.12 Modify (Machining parameters in drawing mode)

With this option you can modify certain machining aspects:

1.4.12.1 Order machining

1.4.12.2 Avoid holes already cut

1.4.12.3 Continuous cut semi-automatically

1.4.12.4 Transform machining

1.4.12.5 Copy machining

1.4.12.6 Modify movements

1.4.12.7 Modify the head management of rapids

1.4.12.8 Modify the compensation of a contour

97
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.1 Microjoints

This is a powerful option which allows to introduce micro-joints in the parts after the machining
process has been done.

Width value of micro-joint (e.g. 10,000)

This is the distance which will be left as micro-joint in the clicked parts.

Position

Depending on the clicked point and the option selected here, the micro-joint will be inserted in
different section of the contour. For example, with the following part using the clicked point:

The result will be different depending on the selection:

This change can be done in more than just the clicked part depending on the option chosen in
Make on.

For example, with the following group of parts, if clicking in the signed one:

Depending on the chosen option, the change will be applied to the pointed parts:

See also the Technology - Microjoints (See page XXXX) for manual assignations.

1.4.13.2 Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour

With this parameter the user can place the "Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour”.
Available as well for combination machines.

The system allows the user to automatically assign a microjoint attribute to the contours with cut
technology depending on the size of these contours (small, medium or large). In order to define
the different sizes, the user must specify the maximum dimensions of a small contour and the
minimum dimensions of a large contour.

98
Lantek Punch module

The microjoint values will be taken from the values specified in the automatic microjoints
depending on material and thickness or taking a fixed value.

Using this it will be possible to execute this option by modifying the machining.

1.4.13.3 Order machining

1.4.13.3.1 Put in order by tools

1.4.13.3.2 Put in order by tools manually

1.4.13.3.3 Put in order by angles

1.4.13.3.4 Put in order by paths

1.4.13.3.5 Order punch sequence

1.4.13.3.1 Order machining by punches

This option orders the machining according to the dimensions of the punches. First the machining
is carried out with cutting punches and then plunger dies and for every type of punch the
machining is carried out, first using the smallest ones and then using the biggest.

1.4.13.3.2 Order machining by punches manually

This option orders the machining according to the dimension of the punches.

1.4.13.3.3 Order machining in angles

This option orders machining in angles, that is to say within the machining process carried out
with a single punch, all the punching with the same angle is done first and this process is followed
by those which have a different angle. The first angle used is 0 degrees, increasing in
anticlockwise direction.

99
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.3.4 Order machining in paths

This option orders machining minimizing the path between the different punching areas
(groovings, hollowings, linear structures, grids, etc.).

1.4.13.3.5 Order punch sequence

Choose this option to order machining by path only, to optimize without taking into account that
paths could be optimized by punch angle changes.

Only order the sequence of the selected tool

The order will take effect only for the selected tool

Only show the machining of the selected tool

If this option is enabled, then the system will show just the machining operation of the selected
tool.

Show the direction of movements

Enabled, the system will show the direction of the movements with an arrow in the trajectory.

Reverse cycles automatically

This parameter will go ordering the structures in automatic mode.

Explode punch macros

With this option the user can select three different parameters they are: No, Yes and Ask.

With these option if the user select "Ask" option, each time a machining macro is selected, the
system will ask if it must be exploded to be order the punch sequence of this macro in a different
way

Order mode

100
Lantek Punch module

The user will go clicking the elements, and the system will go ordering them depending on the
option selected here:

Before: The first clicked elements will be the last machined ones.

After: In this case, the first clicked elements will be the first machined ones.

Make on

The configuration made on this window can be applied to:

-The selected part

-Identical parts with the same angle

-All identical parts

1.4.13.4 Modify punch cycles

There are different options for changing the punch cycles:

1.4.13.4.1 Reverse structures

1.4.13.4.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns

1.4.13.4.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns

1.4.13.4.4 Change the initial point of grid structures

1.4.13.4.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures

1.4.13.4.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures

1.4.13.4.7 Delete stroke on patterns

101
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.4 Modify punch cycles

There are different options for changing the punch cycles:

1.4.13.4.1 Reverse structures

1.4.13.4.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns

1.4.13.4.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns

1.4.13.4.4 Change the initial point of grid structures

1.4.13.4.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures

1.4.13.4.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures

1.4.13.4.7 Delete stroke on patterns

1.4.13.4.1 Reverse structures

The execution of this option over an existing structure will change between the end and starting
points of the structure resulting in a direction reverse.

1.4.13.4.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns

When a structure is selected, the system will delete one hit:

102
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.4.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns

When doing the pattern, the machine will perform first the pair hits and then the odd ones. For
example, if applied in the following structure:

The machining sequence will be:

This option is good for the tools because in this way they will always give the hits centered.

1.4.13.4.4 Change the initial point of grid structures (Modify

punch cycles)

It changes the initial point of the structure for the first hit of any of the selected corner:

103
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.4.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures

The main direction of execution of the grid structure will be changed from horizontal to vertical
and the opposite:

1.4.13.4.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures

When selecting the structure, the machining sequence will change into zigzag ones:

1.4.13.4.7 Delete stroke on patterns

With this option it will be possible for the user to delete strikes from structures through different
kinds of selection: Points, Window, Inside of a contour, Outside of a contour and Out of the part.

After the strokes deletion, the structures will be reconstructed and if necessary divided.

104
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5 Modify nibble cycles

There are different options for changing the nibble cycles:

1.4.13.5.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value

1.4.13.5.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

1.4.13.5.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point

1.4.13.5.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point

1.4.13.5.5 Reverse nibble cycle

1.4.13.5.6 Break nibble cycle

1.4.13.5.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance

1.4.13.5.8 Join nibble cycles

1.4.13.5.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

1.4.13.5.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble

1.4.13.5.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble

1.4.13.5.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots

1.4.13.5.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble

1.4.13.5.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles

1.4.13.5.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value

This option reduces the selected nibbling in the value inserted by the user. The user must select
a nibble cycle and the system will request a value to reduce it. The reduction will take place in the
selected side:

105
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

With this option, one nibble cycle can be made longer the given value in mm:

Value = 1,000

The difference between this option and the Modify - Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value is that in
this case the change will be made only in the clicked part don't allowing to apply to more than one
part at the same time.

1.4.13.5.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point

This option allows to change the nibbling making it shorter. For making it, the user should select
the nibbling side to short and the new point where that side will arrive:

106
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point

This option allows to change the nibbling making it longer. For making it, the user should select
the nibbling side to short and the new point where that side will arrive:

In this case, the difference can be seen using the sheet simulation option (F12):

1.4.13.5.5 Reverse nibble cycle

This option inverts the direction of the nibbling changing the initial and final points of the selected
nibble cycle:

107
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5.6 Break nibble cycle

This option inserts a microcut in the selected nibble cycle. The system will divide the nibbling into
two with the distance given by the user.

The microcut will be performed on the same point where the nibbling was selected:

1.4.13.5.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance

This option allows breaking a nibbling cycle at a specific point. The system inserts a microjoint
inside a nibbling cycle doing so by entering the distance with respect to any of the start/end points
of the nibbling cycle. If the selected point when clicking on the nibbling is closer to the nibblings
start point, then, the system will take into account the distance from the start point. If the selected
point is closer to the nibblings end point, then, the system will take this end point into account. It
is possible to measure the distance to the micro-joint's middle point or start point. If the distance
is shorter than the length of the tool used for the nibbling cycle, then, the system will take into
account the length of the mentioned tool.

This option is available for punching and combination machines and it is included in the ‘Drawing’
module as web as in the ‘Nesting and machining’ module.

108
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5.8 Join nibble cycles

When two nibblings have the same direction but they are separated, they can be joined into one
nibble cycle. The user must select the nibbling and the system will look for the nearest nibble
cycle to join:

1.4.13.5.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

With this option the exterior nibble cycles can be lengthen for all the parts at once. The user can
select to perform it in the horizontal or vertical contours, or both giving values to the X and Y
parameters:

For example, with this nesting:

109
Lantek Punch module

All the exterior nibble cycles will be lengthen:

There is also one checkbox Only corners which if enable will apply the lengthen only to those
parts whose corners have not any special treatment, only one nibbling for horizontal and one for
vertical. In this case, the parts which fillets or chamfers will not be modified.

In the example, the part of the right have not a standard corner and it will not be changed if the
Only corners checkbox is enabled:

1.4.13.5.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble

Using this option, the nibble cycle's overlapping will be increased making the total number of hits
of the nibbling higher.

For example, the following nibble cycle will be done with 7 hits:

110
Lantek Punch module

Applying this option, the overlapping between hits will be more and the hits now are 8:

1.4.13.5.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble (Modify nibble

cycles)

When a linear nibble is selected, the system will delete one hit:

1.4.13.5.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots

When doing a nibbling, normally all the hits are done in the direction sequence. Using this option,
the hits of the selected nibbling will be done alternating trying always not to perform two near hits.

For example, the following nibbling will be made from the left to the right with sequence hits:

When this option is applied, the order changes making first the alternate four hits, and completing
the rest with alternate hits too:

111
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.5.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble

The value given here will be the minimum overlapping value which must comply the existing
linear nibbles. The following example means that every linear nibble must overlap at least the 8%
of the tool length:

Minimal overlapping for lineal nibble in automatic mode (enabled)

% minimal overlapping for internal nibble 8,000

% minimal overlapping for external nibble 8,000

When using the automatic options, the user can configure a minimal overlapping in the automatic
machining - Nested punch configuration - Outside punching

1.4.13.5.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles

This option allows changing the punches at both sides of a slot. This option is valid to apply a
microjoint punch on a predefined lineal nibble.

The default values for the punch to be used at both sides and the overlap for this punch will be
the same as the ones defined for the automatic microjoints at part level.

Double punch

This option allows 2 stroke distance a predefined value (by default the width of the side
microjoint) in the option " Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles".

112
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.6 Modify pockets

Shorten pocket a value

This option reduces a hollowing in a particular value on the side selected by the user. The user
must select the hollowing to be reduced and then the system will request a value to reduce the
hollowing The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

Lengthen pocket a value

This option increases a hollowing by a particular value on the side selected by the user. The user
must select the hollowing to be reduced and then the system will request a value to increase the
hollowing. The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

Modify pocket to a point

This option alters a hollowing to a particular point inserted by the user. The user must select the
hollowing to be altered and then insert the point to which alteration must reach (increase or
reduce) The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

113
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.7 Modify punch instruction

Clicking in any instruction, the system will display a panel with all the values used to make the
instruction (way of definition, position and angle) and the user will be able to change them.

1.4.13.8 Explode all

The system will decompose all the structures of the sheet which are enabled in this window into
simple punching operations.

Rectangular
pockets

Circular
pockets

Linear nibble - > Simple punching

cycles operations
irregular
patterns

Linear patterns

Circular
patterns

Grid patterns

114
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.9 Explode by selection

This option allows the user to exploit any machined structures . Here, exploit means that any
punching structure (except for nibbling) will be performed as individual punches).

1.4.13.10 Regenerate

This option allows to regenerate any sequence of individual punches in some kind of structure in
order to optimize the punching program. The system will look for the enabled structures of the left
and will convert them into the structures of the right of the "=>" arrow:

Single punchings => Linear structures

Restores single punchings in linear structures.

Linear structures => Linear nibblings

Restores linear structures in nibblings if the punchings of the structure are lapped.

Linear structures => Grid structures

Restores linear structures in grid patterns if the punchings of the structure are not lapped.

Structures of two points => Simple punchings processes

Exploits structures of two points as they are more easily created as simple punchings processes.

NOTE: No type of sequence in nibbling can be regenerated.

115
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.11 Regenerate by selection

This option allows to select a group of instruction to create a structure. There are several options
to regenerate:

Simple punching operations => Linear patterns

Restores single punchings in linear patterns.

Linear patterns => Linear nibble cycles

Restores linear patterns in nibblings if the punchings of the pattern are lapped.

Linear patterns => Grid patterns

Restores linear patterns in grid patterns if the punchings of the patterns are not lapped.

Pattern of only two points => Simple punchings operations

Exploits patterns of two points as they are more easily created as simple punchings processes.

1.4.13.12 Replace punches

This option allows the user to replace a machining punch, that is, if among the punches used in
machining can perform the same punching process as the one that has to be replaced, in that
case the selected punch will definitively be replaced. In order to do this, the user will have to
select the punch to be replaced.

1.4.13.13 Replace one punch with other

This option is very useful in the situation where the whole machining of the sheet has been done,
but one used tool is broken. Using this option, the system will show a list with all the used tools in
the current sheet, and allows to select one for changing with other one.

For example, if working with a RD-5mm tool which is broken, the user can change this tool for a
RD-4.75 one which will make all the machining of the RD-5 ones.

116
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.14 Replace one punch with other respecting the

geometry

This option is very useful in the situation where the whole machining of the sheet has been done,
but one used tool is broken. Using this option, the system will show a list with all the used tools in
the current sheet, and allows to select one for changing with other one. Keeping the machining
geometry.

1.4.13.15 Cancel punchings from a punch

This option allows to select a punch, among those used in the machining, whose punching will be
automatically deleted.

1.4.13.16 Delete duplicate punches

This option allows to select a punch, among those used in the machining, whose punching will be
automatically deleted.

1.4.13.17 Modify Lead-in/outs

1.4.13.18 Modify head management of rapids

This option will introduce a head up/down instruction just before the the clicked rapid movements:

117
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.19 Transform machining

This option allows to move a part of the machining Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the machining to be moved. The selection button bar (See page XXXX) may be of
assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select a point of reference.

5. If the selected machining is to be rotated, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX), or
click on the right button of the mouse and hold it down while rotating with the mouse.

6. Select the insert point.

7. Click on the left button of the mouse.

118
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.20 Copy machining

This option enables to copy a part of the machining. Once the option is selected follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen:
1. Select the machining instructions to be copied. The selection button bar (See page XXXX)
may be of assistance.

2. Repeat step 1 until ending the selection.

3. Click on the right button of the mouse or the last button of the selection button bar.

4. Select one of the following types of copy:

Makes a single copy.

Makes several copies to any places desired.

Makes a given number of copies (n), on a straight line with an angle a, maintaining a
distance d between the copies.

Makes a given number of copies (n), on a circumference, maintaining an angle a between

the copies.

If the Rotation parameter is Yes the selected machining will be rotated to the same angle
corresponding to its position within the circumference. If it is No, the machining will not be
rotated. See how the machining changes by selecting one or another option.

Makes a copy in the form of a matrix. Each position of the matrix will contain a copy.

n1: Number of columns.

n2: Number of lines.

a: Rotation angle of the matrix.

d1: Distance between columns.

d2: Distance between lines.

119
Lantek Punch module

Once the machining has been selected, the system will verify which geometries are equal
than the selected machining and copies the machining in these geometries automatically.

1.4.13.21 Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble

moves

Using this option will make all the cycles and nibble hits of the sheets be performed in alternate
sequence:

For applying this change only in the exterior cycles and nibble moves, use the Apply alternate
strokes on all the exterior cycles and nibble moves.

1.4.13.22 Modify movements

This option allows to change the rapid movements trajectory. For using it, the user should click
one rapid movement and move it using the mouse.

This is very useful for avoiding manually that the turret pass over a dangerous zone:

120
Lantek Punch module

1.4.13.23 Move simple punch

This option allows to change the position of a simple punch operation. For doing it, simply select
the simple punch and give the new coordinates (X-Y or polar) in the prompted screen.

1.4.13.24 Slide simple punch

With a segment of the referenced part, allows to slide at a given X or Y distance the selected
geometry always referred to that segment.

1.4.13.25 Retract clearance in punches

Modify retract clearance in punches

Allows to change the work height of a tool.

Duplicate punches at different heights

Allows to place duplicated punches at different heights.

Delete punches with retract clearance

It will erase the punches with certain work height.

Modify punches with retract clearance

Modifies the height of the punches which already have a certain work height configured.

121
Lantek Punch module

1.4.14 Optimizing machining (punching)

This option allows to optimize some machining parameters by means of the following dialogue:

Delete non-used tools

This option deletes all the non-used punches from the punching program.

Optimize punch changes

This option optimizes the machining by minimizing the punch changes.

1.4.15 Delete machining

This option allows to delete the desired machining instructions. When selecting an element of a
macro machining from all the selection mode (except All machining) the user can choose whether
all the macro will be deleted or just the selected element by using the checkbox Delete the macro
as a whole.

Current instruction

Deletes the current machining instruction. The user can move between the machining sequence
using the Simulation (See page XXXX) options.

Machining by selection

122
Lantek Punch module

When the user clicks on any contour of the part, all the machining of that contour will be deleted:

Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved

This option is to simulate the machining toolpath selection with the mouse is moved (only
available to delete machining by selection and geometry selection options). The system will use
the color configure for selections.

Machining by selection of geometry

In this case, the selection mode allows to delete the machining of all the selected geometries:

When Machining by selection of geometry is enabled, there are two more option;

1.Delete the macro as a whole.

123
Lantek Punch module

2.Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved: With this option the user can simulate the
machining toolpath selection with the mouse is moved (only available to delete machining by
selection and geometry selection options). The system will use the color configure for selection.

From-to

Deletes several machining instructions using the next two steps:

1. Select the first instruction to be deleted from the list with the left button of the mouse.

2. Hold down the <SHIFT> or <CTRL> key while selecting the last instruction to be deleted with
the left button of the mouse.
All machining

It deletes all the machining of the sheet including the initialization.

1.5 Technology

1.5.1 Speed rates

1.5.2 CN compensation

1.5.3 System compensation

1.5.4 Tools

1.5.5 Turrets

1.5.6 Fix punch order

1.5.7 Work chutes

1.5.8 Chute assignment

1.5.9 Box assign

1.5.10 Postprocessor words

1.5.11 Change cutting direction

124
Lantek Punch module

1.5.12 Contour ordering

1.5.13 Lead in / Lead outs

1.5.14 Micro-joints

1.5.15 Bridges

1.5.16 Loops (only drawing module)

1.5.17 Chamferings (only drawing module)

1.5.18 Cut technology

1.5.19 Contour attributes

1.5.20 Delete technology

1.5.1 Speed rates (cutting)

Using this option, the user can change the different speeds of the machine:

Cut speed 4000,000 mm./m

Chamfered 4000,000 mm./m
speed
Powder 4000,000 mm./m
mark
speed
Drill mark 4000,000 mm./m
speed
Pen mark 4000,000 mm./m
speed
Cut mark 4000,000 mm./m
speed
Rapid 4000,000 mm./m
speed

125
Lantek Punch module

1.5.2 CN compensation

Normally, the user defines which compensation type is going to use for all the machining process
in the Automatic machining - Cut (See page XXXX) section of the machine configuration.

If the chosen compensation type is by Numeric Control, then using this option the user can
choose the side of the compensation (Left, Right, Cancel) and the index for the Numeric Control.

1.5.3 System compensation

This option enables to indicate the direction and cutter radius when the compensation is to be
made by the system. The compensation is made so that the machine does not modify the
dimensions of the part upon cutting it.

1.5.4 Tools

This option allows the user to select a punch to carry out hand-operated machining operations.
The system will display a list of available tools (see criterions (See page XXXXXX)) .

This option allows the user to make or not make use of the lit-up punch both for punching and
nibbling. The blocking of the punch is only to be taken into account with automatic punching.

126
Lantek Punch module

1.5.5 Turrets

Allows to select with which turret the system is going to work (active or one of defined Standard
Turret). Previously, the Standard turrets for the current machine should be created.

1.5.6 Fix punch order

New option to define, at part level, the order of the tools when machining the sheet.

This options allows you to execute the following operations:

Manual: The order between two tools is defined. One tool can be defined to go before another,
though this does not mean immediately after.

Automatic: The order to use the tools in the sheet will be the same as in the part.

Delete the fixed order: Removes the already defined order previously fixed.

Test the fixed order: Allows you to test whether the defined order for tools is coherent or not. For
instance it checks that no circular references are created (first a tool, then another…, and later
the first one again).

When machining a sheet, with parts with an already defined order to use the tools, if any circular
reference is generated, a message will be output to warn about the situation.

1.5.7 Tolerance in nibblings

This option allows the to assign tolerance to a part.

If no tolerance is assigned to the part, this value will be taken from the tolerance configured for
the machine in the punching parameters section, or, if any configuration exists, in
material/thickness dependent data - punching parameters.

127
Lantek Punch module

1.5.8 Work chutes

Here the user can define how the parts will be evacuated in manual or semiautomatic methods:

Manual

The user will go clicking one by one the evacuation method of each part (is the same if the part is
equal to already evacuated ones)

Semiautomatic

The user specifies how one part will be evacuated, and then the system can apply this
configuration to all the equal parts placed in the same sheet.

Automatic

The system will detect the best evacuation method for the parts and will apply them automatically.

Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

With this option the user can do automatic evacuations to lengthen exterior nibble cycles. This
parameter will be only available in STOP, LIFT, or TRAP evacuations. only in Automatic and
Semi-automatic evacuation.

Move the sheet to the trap

Using this option the user can move the sheet to the trap when extracting the parts by trap. This
option inserts a rapid after finishing the outside punching and before extracting the part to place it
totally inside the trap zone (if it is possible).

This option is now available for punching and combined machines.

Move the pressing point interactively

When the user is in semiautomatic mode then the parameter "Move the pressing point
interactively' is on, the user will be able to modify the pressing point and translate it inside the
zone delimited by the "Head 1", "Head 2", "Absolute pressing" limits and "pressing with regard to
extraction point" limits.

With this parameter the user can define. That is to say, this will be the zone where the suction
cups carriage can be moved avoiding collisions.

128
Lantek Punch module

In this the user can configure the Lift evacuation with punch exterior technology. In previous, for
combinated machines, the evacuations where only available if the exterior contour was defined
as cut technology. From this version on, parts can be evacuated manually and/or automatically
even if they have punch technology in external contours.

1.5.9 Chute assignment

This option allows to configure the chute assignment (in the case the machine has this capacity)
of the parts that the user selects. The system provides a powerful automatic way for the
evacuation management with the Technology - Work chutes (See page XXXXXX)option of the
menu.

The user can configure the type of sorting (None, Stop, Trap or Special Trap), as well as the
number of the trap and the number of the box where the selected parts will be stored.

If this option is used in the nesting module, it has no influence in the generated program.

Move the pressing point interactively

When user is in semiautomatic mode then the parameter "Move the pressing point interactively' is
on, the user will be able to modify the pressing point and translate it inside the zone delimited by
the "Head 1", "Head 2", "Absolute pressing" limits and "pressing with regard to extraction point"
limits.

With this parameter the user can define. That is to say, this will be the zone where the suction
cups carriage can be moved avoiding collisions.

1.5.10 Box assignment

This option allows the to assign manually a determined box to the selected parts. The system
provides a powerful automatic way for the evacuation management with the Technology - Work
chutes (See page XXXXXX)option of the menu.

This option must be enabled when in an already machined sheet the user wants to change the
box of one part.

Number of box (3)

129
Lantek Punch module

The clicked parts will be assigned to be evacuated into the number of box given here.

The system allows to assign the box just in the selected part, in the identical parts placed with the
same angle or in all the identical parts: In the following schema, the parts which will change if
clicking in the upper-left ones depending on the selected option are pointed with an arrow:

1.5.11 Postprocessor words

This option enables to introduce special instructions associated with the postprocessor in the
machining program. Once this option is selected, select one of the post words that are displayed
in the list by double-clicking or positioning the cursor and clicking on OK. The selected
postprocessor word will be introduced just behind the current instruction of the program (see
Simulation: Program (See page XXXXXX)), just like any other machining instruction:

1.5.12 Change cutting direction

This option enables to invert the direction of the contours as desired. Selecting this option
displays arrows indicating the current direction of cutting for the contours. To change any of them,
select it and the arrows will change direction:

130
Lantek Punch module

The system will prompt for changing the lead in/out from the old position to the clicked one.
Taking the previous example in the same clicked point, the following is the effect depending on
the state of the checkbox:

1.5.13 Contour ordering

This option enables to set the cutting direction of the contours. In the dialogue that appears,
assign one direction to the outside and another to the inside contours. Click on OK and the
contours will be classified as indicated:

1.5.14 Micro-joints

This option allows the user to enter a micro-joint geometry, which can be very useful to keep the
parts fixed to the sheet once they are machined, by means of the defined clamping. The clamping
geometry can be selected from the following:

Two joined elements are required. The microjoint should be placed on the linking point
closest to the selected area.

131
Lantek Punch module

Selecting the element and defining the position where the microjoint will be placed
is enough.

Using the configuration made on Automatic Micro-joint (See page XXXX)section, the system
will insert microjoints on the nested parts.

Depending on the clicked point and the option selected here, the micro-joint will be inserted
in different section of the contour. For example, with the following part using the clicked point:

The result will be different depending on the selection:

This change can be done in more than just the clicked part depending on the option chosen in
Make on.

For example, with the following group of parts, if clicking in the signed one:

Depending on the chosen option, the change will be applied to the pointed parts:

132
Lantek Punch module

This option enables the user to delete the defined micro-joint, with the assistance of element
selection buttons bar (See page XXXX).

In order to define the geometry of the micro-joint, select this button so that the clamping
values. are established.

From here the automatic micro-joint configuration dialogue can be shown.

Using this option, the user can change the lead in/out point of the microjoint. For example,
the next figure is a part with microjoints:

Changing that point is easy:

133
Lantek Punch module

The micro-joint have special treatment which can cause problems in some machining
operations like the repositions. This option will include the assigned micro-joint into the part
contours for being treated in the future as a geometry allowing to solve the possible problems:

See how to assign microjoints manually example (See page XXXX).

1.5.15 Loops

This option enables you to select different types of buckles and place them as desired. Selecting
this option displays a button box with the following options:

Select one of these types of loops and then select the element where the loop is to be
located.

Click on this button so that the system places the loops automatically.

Click on this button to delete the loops as desired. The selection button bar (See page
XXXXXX) may be of assistance.

Click on this button to configure the dimensions of the loops.

134
Lantek Punch module

1.5.15 Bridges

Bridges is a utility which avoids multiple starting in machining, which means saving time. It is an
additional geometry which joins two parts or geometric elements. They can be joined by open or
closed bridges. It is not possible to install bridges in machined elements or with assigned
approaches. The direction of the geometry must be taken into account.

When activating the option bridges from the technology menu, a buttons box will appear which
allows to control and define the bridges. These are:

1.5.15.1 Opened bridge

1.5.15.2 Closed bridge

1.5.15.3 Delete bridges

1.5.15.4 Automatic bridges

1.5.15.5 Configure

1.5.16.1 Opened bridge

It defines a bridge in such a way that the machined part is completely cut. The area of the part
where the bridge is defined is machined twice which is a drawback.

See the manual bridge assignation example (See page XXXX).

1.5.16.2 Closed bridge

The defined bridge keeps the two parts joined after machining.

See the manual bridge assignation example (See page XXXX)..

135
Lantek Punch module

1.5.16.3 Delete bridges

Deletes defined bridges. (See element selection buttons bar (See page XXXX).).

See the manual bridge assignation example (See page XXXX)..

1.5.16.4 Automatic bridges

Establishes bridges automatically. Bridges will be of the previously selected type, that is, if an
open bridge was defined or the open bridge button was pressed, bridges will be open and closed
in the opposite case. Calculated bridges will take into account the availability of the multitorch.

The parameters which are going to be used for the bridges are the configured on the Bridge
values (See page XXXX). section of the machine configuration.

1.5.16.5 Configure bridges

Sets the dimension of the bridge.

a distance (e.g. 5,000)

This is the length of the bridge between parts.

Maximum length (e.g. 25,000)

This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating one bridge between contours.

On corners

The bridges will be applied on part's corners. In the example, there are bridges on corners that
allows to make all the machining without raising the head.

136
Lantek Punch module

Type of bridge definition

There are two possibilities: free and orthogonal. The last one will force the bridge to be always
with straight lines although the clicked coordinates are not orthogonal between them:

1.5.17 Punch technology

This option allows the user to assign cutting technology to the contour of the currently displayed
part:

1.5.17.1 Micro-joint 1

1.5.17.2 Micro-joint 2

1.5.17.3 Micro-joint 3

1.5.17.4 Micro-joint 4

1.5.17.5 Micro-joint

137
Lantek Punch module

1.5.17.6 Shear

1.5.17.7 Common punch

1.5.17.8 No common punch

1.5.17.9 Mark texts by technology

1.5.17.10 Automatic

1.5.17.11 Delete

1.5.17.1 Micro-joint 1

This option assigns microcuts adjusted to the ends of the selected elements. The user must
select the item to which he wants to assign a microcut and enter the microcutting value. The
microcut will be adjusted to the end of the element which is nearest the selection point of that
element:

Select micro-joint element Type value of micro-joint

Value = 30.000

1.5.17.2 Micro-joint 2

This option assigns microcuts to the selected elements. The user must select the element which
will be microcut, define the point where the microcut will take place and enter the microcutting
value:

138
Lantek Punch module

1.5.17.3 Micro-joint 3

This option creates a geometric Microjoint in both corners of a linear segment selected.

1.5.17.4 Micro-joint 4

This option creates a geometric microjoint in all corners of a all segments of a selected part.

1.5.17.5 Micro-joint

This option assigns microcuts to the whole selected elements:

1.5.17.6 Shear

This option assigns shears technology to the selected elements (see element selection buttons
bar ):

139
Lantek Punch module

1.5.17.7 Common punch

Depending on the used technology, the nesting module will work in different way. This options
assigns common punching technology to the selected elements (see element selection buttons
bar ):

The user can configure the system to assign automatically the desired punch technology to all the
parts when executing the nesting module. This can be done in Configure Machines - Save data

1.5.17.8 No common punch

Depending on the used technology, the nesting module will work in different way. This option
assigns uncommon punching technology to the selected elements (see element selection buttons
bar):

The user can configure the system to assign automatically the desired punch technology to all the
parts when executing the nesting module. This can be done in Configure Machines - Save data

140
Lantek Punch module

1.5.17.9 Mark texts by technology

This option assigns marked texts to the design. Once this button is pressed, the system will show
a dialogue where the user can type the text, and choose the size, orientation, technology,
thickness and the fonts directory for mark texts.

The user can a configure the separation between characters automatically by selecting
"Automatic separation between character" option, or can type the horizontal separation between
character manually.

There is one option which will include automatic marked texts in every machined part. This can
be done in Configure Machines - Inkjet section.

1.5.17.10 Automatic

This option assigns automatically cutting technology to the contours of the part.

The user can configure the system to assign automatically the desired punch technology to all the
parts when executing the nesting module. This can be done in Configure Machines - Save data

With this option it is possible for the user to assign the following parameters:

Assign tecnology...

-Non-common punching

-Common punching

-Shearing

-Automatic

Technology in already punched outside elements: The available options to assign

technology are:

-The corresponding one: The system will assign to all the punched elements the same technology
as the external = automatic.

-None

-No cut: No cut technology will be assigned.

141
Lantek Punch module

To assign technology to a punched elements it is necessary to have a: "Minimum length

percentage of the already punched segment to apply the technology".

1.5.17.11 Delete

This options allows to delete the technology assigned to the selected contours of the part (see
element selection buttons bar buttons).

1.5.18 Delete technology

Executing this option will make the system to erase all the technology data of the part at once
(loops, microjoints, bridges... for cut, common/non common cut, shear, microcuts... for punching).

1.6 View

1.6.1 Orthogonal F2

1.6.2 Axis F3

1.6.3 Bitmap

1.6.4 Snap modes

1.6.5 Simulation speed

1.6.6 Texts / dimensions

1.6.7 Zoom window F4

1.6.8 Zoom scale F5

1.6.9 Zoom base F6

1.6.10 Zoom previous F7

1.6.11 Zoom all F8

142
Lantek Punch module

1.6.12 Zoom dynamic

1.6.13 Full screen F10

1.6.14 Redraw F9

1.6.15 Run F11

1.6.16 Sheet simulation F12

1.6.17 Current turret

1.6.18 Settings

1.6.19 Tool bars

1.6.1 Orthogonal F2

When the orthogonal mode is activated, it will only be possible to draw vertical and horizontal
lines. If an attempt is made to draw an inclined line, the system will not permit it.

Once selected, this option remains active until deselected. To select or deselect this option select
the Orthogonal option in the View menu or hit the key F2.

1.6.2 Axis

Enables the X and Y axes to be displayed on the screen.

Once selected, this option remains active until deselected. To select or deselect the option, select
the Axis option in the View menu or hit the key F3.

1.6.3 Bitmap

Allows you to display a .bmp file in the upper left-hand corner of the drawing screen. The zoom
function can be used with this drawing as with any other normal element, but if you try to reduce
the drawing too much it will disappear.

143
Lantek Punch module

It is useful for drawing new figures whose exact shape is not very important. To make the drawing
disappear, simply deactivate the View/Bitmap option. In the print parts (See page XXXXX) option
the inserted bitmap will not appear.

1.6.4 Snap modes

The CAD/CAM module of the system provides different powerful methods for making the edition
easier. One are the Snap Points which will determine how the user can catch and specific point
for the CAD/CAM operations.

There is always one Snap Point mode selected from the toolbar:

Picked Point: The system will select the point where the mouse has been clicked.

Center point: if the cursor is placed in a circular element, like an arc, the point will be the
center of that element. If not, the point is the center of the contour:

Center point contour: This option acts like the previous one, but it will always select the
center of the contour:

144
Lantek Punch module

Near Point: When the cursor is placed near geometries, if this mode is selected, the system
will catch the points of that geometry as soon as the circle cursor contains it:

End Point: The captured point will be the outermost one of the geometry nearest to the
cursor:

Intersection Point: The cursor will get the point where two or more geometries cuts together:

Middle point: The system will capture the point of the middle of the geometry. In the
following example, the system catches the middle point of the upper segment of the rectangle:

Tangent point: When the cursor pass over a circle, the system will select the tangent point to
that circle depending on the geometry the user is drawing. In the example, the system calculates
the tangent point to the segment:

145
Lantek Punch module

Projected point: when drawing a segment, the system will choose the point where that
segment is perpendicular to the contour where the cursor is placed:

Quadrant point: When the cursor pass over a circle, the system will select the quadrant point
nearest to the cursor:

Mixed point: The mixed point uses various snap modes at the same time. It selects centres
of arcs or circles as well as end points and intersections. If it finds no geometry it positions itself
on the point it is on.

When the system asks for a point, you can also type it in directly. When you start to type the point
coordinates, a dialog box will appear where you can define both the point coordinates and the
mode in which you wish to define them.

146
Lantek Punch module

Now the user is having special access to origin point (0.0,0.0). If the point access type is
Combined or Intersection, the coordinate's origin (0.0,0.0) will be considered as a special point,
and while moving the mouse next to the origin it will be shown as active point.

With this option it is possible for the user to access to any geometry element of the active sheet
and/or remnant with the snap point option.

1.6.5 Simulation speed

The system will show in the screen the toolbar which allows to change the simulation speed:

1.6.6 Text / dimensions

The system will show or hide the existing Texts and Dimensions (See page XXXX) of the design.

1.6.7 Zoom window

Enables use of a rectangle to select of the area to be enlarged. The center of the window
becomes the center of the screen and the interior area is enlarged or reduced to the maximum.
The points can be introduced by typing the co-ordinates or using the mouse.

To access this option, select the Zoom window option in the View menu or hit the key F4:

There are other zoom types, see View (See page XXXX)

147
Lantek Punch module

1.6.8 Zoom scale

Reduces or enlarges the visualization of the drawing depending on the given values.

1,5 : 1,0000

The system will perform a zoom in the proportions given. In the example, the system will make a
50% zoom-in because the proportion is 1,5 : 1.

If the given value is lower than 1, then the operation will be zoom-out. For example, with a value
of 0,5:1, the system will make a 50% zoom-out.

There are other zoom types, see View.

1.6.9 Zoom base

The part of the drawing that is found between the limits will be displayed on the screen. The
system default defines some given limits, but they can be modified using the option Utilities:
Define limits (See page XXXXX)

To access this option, select the Zoom base option in the View menu or hit the key F6.

There are other zoom types, see View.

1.6.10 Previous zoom

Enables recovery of the previous screen. In zoom mode use this option to return to the previous
screen visualization.

To access this option, select the option Zoom previous in the View menu or hit the key F7.

There are other zoom types, see View.

148
Lantek Punch module

1.6.11 Zoom all

This option changes the visualization so that all the drawing fills the screen. It will be enlarged or
reduced in function of the limits of the screen. To access this option, select the Zoom all option in
the View menu or hit the key F8.

There are other zoom types, see View.

1.6.12 Zoom dynamic

This option permits to do a dynamic zoom. These are the steps:

1. Click the zoom dynamic button, and a window with a X will appear:

2. Click the left button of the mouse and move the mouse until getting the desired window size:

149
Lantek Punch module

3. Click again on the left button of the mouse. For changing the window size, just repeat steps
1, 2 and 3.
4. Move the mouse to the area to extend and click the right button of the mouse:

There are other zoom types, see View.

1.6.13 Full screen

The system will show in the screen to activate/deactivate this view, by pressing F10.

1.6.14 Redraw

Redraws all the elements of the drawing. Elements that have served as aids to draw any element,
but that do not form any part of the drawing will disappear.

To access this option, select the Redraw option in the View menu or hit the key F9:

150
Lantek Punch module

1.6.15 Run

With this option, the system will make a visual simulation of all the machining process including
repositions, rapid movements, evacuations...:

To access this option, select the Run option in the View menu or hit the key F11.

The user can select the simulation speed with the View - Simulation speed (See page XXXXX)
option of the menu. Also the Simulation menu allows to select multiple options when making the
simulation.

For help about the simulation menu, select the correct link:

1.6.16 Sheet simulation

Visualizes the drawing on a sheet. It changes the background color to simulate a sheet.

151
Lantek Punch module

Once selected, this option remains active until deselected. To select or deselect this option select
the Sheet simulation option in the View menu or hit the key F12.

1.6.17 Current turret

Please choose the desired option of the menu for help:

1.6.17.1 View - Current Turret

1.6.17.2 View - System status - Current turret

1.6.17.3 Machining - Modify - Allow tools to be moved if required

1.6.17.1 View - Current Turret

The current turret configuration will be shown in the screen with the different features of each
station. Also, the user can see what punches are placed in the turret in every moment.

When one punch is selected, clicking on the View button will make the system to show the
different parameters of the placed tool:

152
Lantek Punch module

1.6.17.2 View - System status - Current turret

The current turret configuration will be shown in the screen with the different features of each
station. Also, the user can see what punches are placed in the turret in every moment.

When one punch is selected, clicking on the View button will make the system to show the
different parameters of the placed tool:

1.6.17.3 Machining - Modify - Allow tools to be moved if

required

The current turret configuration will be shown in the screen with the different features of each
station. Also, the user can see what punches are placed in the turret in every moment.

This option allows to move a tool from one to other station if this is necessary for complete the
whole machining of the sheet. This can be done selecting the tool, using the Change button and
giving the new station number. If the tool fix into the new station, it will be changed.

Now this option have a improvement to visualize easier the valid stations on a turret where a tool
can be switched. The valid ones will be displayed in green color.

1.6.18 Settings (Configure Draw and Nest - General )

In this window, the user can configure how the Draw and Nest module shows the different
elements on the screen.

153
Lantek Punch module

Selection by window/capture/trap

Enabled, when the user goes selecting the parts (for erase, copy, move...) they will go changing
of color making the visualization easier:

Simulate selection when mouse is moved

Enabled, when the mouse pass over a segment, it will change of color showing which contour will
be selected if the mouse is clicked:

Show micro-joints

Enabled, the microjoints will be shown and an exterior line will appear in the contours. This
parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch. For this, the distance
between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the configured tool for the
exteriors.

154
Lantek Punch module

Show micro-joints with points

The system will simulate the micro-joints with two points showing where they are placed:

Display all clamp and work zones

Enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all the work zones, and the clamps in the
configured positions:

The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown. Enabled, the current
station's clamp work zone will be shown with continuous line, and the rest with discontinuous
lines:

155
Lantek Punch module

Display fixed positions points of the clamp

If this parameter is enabled, the system will show the fixed position of the clamps.

NOTE: This is only valid if the clamps work with fixed positions (See sheet Clamps configuration
(See page XXXX)).

Show part references on screen

The part references will be included inside the part's contour. This will not change the machining
of the parts, is only a visualization option:

Show part references on screen

The reference which is shown will be the configured on Nesting - Utilities - Configure - Draw and
Nest - Print section (See page XXXXX).

Show remnant references on screen

When a remnant is generated and if this option is enabled, the system will show the assigned
reference inside it:

Show remnant references on the screen

156
Lantek Punch module

Show part texts on the sheet

From the drawing module it is possible to assign a description text which will have no machining
effect. The way of doing this is using the Utilities - Text option of the menu. For example, in the
following part we included the "Kok 27-06-2002" text:

This text will be shown or not depending on the configuration of this parameter:

Display dimensions on the sheet

Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will be always shown, the user can decide
to keep them in the nesting module or not:

Display dimensions on the sheet

Show non cut contours on the sheet

The system provides an option for assigning non-cut technology to the contours. This means that
these contours will not be machined unless this assigned technology changes.

157
Lantek Punch module

For example, from the drawing module the interior circle will be assigned with non-cut technology
using the Technology - Cut Technology option of the menu:

Depending on the value of this parameter, these non-cut geometries will be shown or not:

Simulate the full remnants

Enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the identification easier:

Move the offset of the part on the sheet

When getting a part from the list, the system will show additional lines from the margin of the part
showing the minimum distance between parts:

158
Lantek Punch module

Show the direction of movements

Enabled will make the system to show with an arrow the direction of every rapid movement:

Selection with multi-torch

When the machine has been configured as multi-torch, the system will make the nesting trying to
use the maximum number of torches. If this option is enabled, when one part is selected, the
system will select the entire multi-torch group (the parts which will be done at the same time as
the selected):

Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch

When Selection with multitorch is enabled then this parameter is highlighted.

159
Lantek Punch module

With this option the user can avoid selection by multitorch when a window is being selected
(capture and/ or trap).

Show selected machining

This option allows to visualize the selected machining.

Postprocessor words

From this window the user can define which text the system will show on sheet when one of the
functions is selected or the user will be able to configure the font and size for all the
postprocessor words which are displayed on the sheet. if none is specified, the system will use
the windows standard font and size configured by default on the computer.

These parameters allow visualizing or hiding postprocessor words without changing the text of
these words. This option will be available from Nesting and Machining module and CAD module.

Trap trap Coolnt on coolnt/on

Open trap trap/open Coolnt off coolnt/off
Close trap trap/close Coolnt coolnt/flood
flood
Lift lift Coolnt coolnt/mist
mist
Unconditional halt Coolnt coolnt/tapkul
stop tapkul
Head up head/up Air on air/on
Head down head/down Air off air/off
Macro start Speed fedrat/

Macro end Multitorch

Font

Note: The user can configure if the number of the multitorch is displayed or not.

Highlight selected part

When the user select a part in the Nesting part list window/at the list of parts window, the
geometry of the selected part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is
activated/enabled.

160
Lantek Punch module

In the same way, if the user selects any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight it on the list
of parts window (with the frame) and all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This highlighted
color can be configured in the color window.

Simulation

From this window the user can define the shear movement while machining simulation.

With this option user can is allowed to define three different movements:

On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.

First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will be moved first in horizontal or vertical and
then the other.

Head radius: With this option the user can define the radius.

1.6.19 Toolbars

This option permits to configure which tool bars are visible. Depending on the module we are
working on (Main, Design, Nesting and Machining), the list of the tool bars will be different. To
display the desired toolbars the user needs to click on their check boxes and click OK.

Besides of the main toolbars, the user can define new ones using the Personalize (See also
XXXXX) button.

1.7 Simulation

1.7.1 Program

1.7.2 ISN position

1.7.3 Mouse positioning

1.7.4 Next

1.7.5 Previous

1.7.6 Begin

1.7.7 End

161
Lantek Punch module

1.7.1 Program

This option displays all the instructions of the machining program on the screen and enables
positioning using the up and down arrow keys, page up and page down, or selecting the
instruction as desired with the mouse.

Print

It is possible to print the program.

Note: The oxy-cutting and plasma postprocessors generate a stop in the program when it is time
for a multi-burner change. This way the user can place the burners according to the printed report

1.7.2 ISN Position

This option takes to the machining instruction corresponding to the line number entered:

162
Lantek Punch module

1.7.3 Mouse positioning

This option enables to be positioned on the machining instruction as desired using the mouse.

For example, if you want to be positioned just after the machining of a contour, select this option
and click on the contour:

1.7.4 Next

This option enables to advance an instruction in the machining program placing it after the current
instruction:

1.7.5 Previous

This option enables to move an instruction back in the machining program placing it prior to the
current instruction:

163
Lantek Punch module

1.7.6 Begin

This option enables to be positioned on the first instruction of the machining program:

1.7.7 End

This option enables to be positioned in the last instruction of the machining program:

164
Lantek Punch module

1.7.8 Next tool

This option allows the user to gain access to the simulation program (see Simulation - Program)
to the following punch change. It goes to the last use of the current tool and just on the beginning
of next one:

1.7.9 Previous tool

This option allows the user to gain access to the simulation program (see Simulation - Program)
to the previous punch change:

165
Lantek Punch module

1.7.10 Next reposition

This option allows to navigate in the simulation program to the next reposition. (see Simulation:
Program):

1.7.11 Previous reposition

This option allows to the user to navigate in the simulation program to the previous reposition.
(see Simulation: Program):

166
Lantek Punch module

1.8 Utilities

1.8.1 Texts

1.8.2 Vectorize texts

1.8.3 Dimension notes

1.8.4 Time and cost

1.8.5 Distances and angles

1.8.6 Angle between three points

1.8.7 Verify part

1.8.8 View geometry

1.8.9 Compare geometries

1.8.10 Define limits

1.8.11 View system status

1.8.12 Select machine

1.8.13 Duct holes

1.8.14 Machining macros

1.8.15 Remnants

1.8.16 Parametrics

1.8.17 Customize

1.8.1 Texts

This option enables to enter an informative text which will not have machining effects. The user
can select the font to use, and the orientation:

167
Lantek Punch module

Font
Arial
Orientation
0

There is Vectorize option which allows to transform the text into geometry. If enabled, then the
system will draw with Bezier curves the typed text. The higher the number of tracts is, the text will
be more precise. The user has the option of doing this later using Utilities - Vectorize texts (See
page XXXX).
Vectorize (Enabled)
No of tracts for the Bezier curves
10

Follow the instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the
screen:
1. To rotate the selected geometry, use the rotation button bar (See page XXXX).
2. Select the insert point.
NOTE: This texts will be only shown in Nesting module if it has been configured on Configure
Draw and Nest - General - Show part texts on the sheet (See page XXXX).

1.8.2 Vectorize texts

This option allows to transform the text into geometry. If enabled, then the system will convert into
bezier curves the selected text. The higher the number of tracts is, the text will be more precise.

Vectorize (enabled)
Number of tracts for the Bezier curves = 10

NOTE: The texts will be only shown in Nesting module if it has been configured on Configure
Draw and Nest - General - Show part texts on the sheet (See page XXXX).

168
Lantek Punch module

1.8.3 Dimension notes

This option enables to dimension the drawing with different types of levels and level sizes (size of
the arrows, the level texts,...). Select the option in the button box that is displayed and follow the
instructions that appear on the status bar (See page XXXX) in the lower part of the screen.

There are different dimension possibilities, which will be placed depending on the Dimension
notes configuration (See page XXXX):

Horizontal measure

Vertical measure

Inclined measure

Radius of an arc

Diameter of circumference

Angle between three points

Angle between two segments

Place dimension notes semi-automatically

With this option, the user selects the geometry to dimension and the system will choose the best
option for it.

Automatic dimensions

In this case, the system will put on dimension notes to every found geometry. The way this option
works depends on the Automatic dimension configuration (See page XXXX) settings.

Delete dimension

With this option, the user can remove existing dimension notes from the design.

169
Lantek Punch module

Configure automatic dimensions

The settings of this dialogue will determine the way the automatic dimension button will work:

Font (e.g. Arial)

This is the font the system will use for the dimensions. Clicking on the three buttons point will
show the fonts dialogue where the user can change the type or the size of the texts.

Percentage (e.g. 3)

This is the maximum text size respect to the part size. For example, if the part length is 200mm,
and the percentage is 4, then the maximum size of the text will be 8mm approximately.

Automatic text

When using the automatic option, it is the system who detects the geometries of the design, and
applies the correct dimension note. With this options, the user can set up different texts which will
be inserted before and/or after every dimension note type. For example, with the following
configuration:

Automatic text Before After

Lineal Linear mm
Radius

Diameter ø
Angle *
The result is:

Prompt for text

170
Lantek Punch module

If using the automatic option, the system will always use the texts placed in the previous option.
But if using the semiautomatic option, then, if this checkbox is enabled, the system will show the
text to be placed in the clicked geometry allowing to change it.

Set dimension attributes as a dependent scale factor

The dimension attributes are the length of the different arrows and lines which are used for the
dimension notes. These can be fixed lengths or can depend on the geometry length. For fixed
lengths, this checkbox must be disabled and the following parameters filled:

If enabled, then the lengths will be geometry dependent:

Put bench marks

• According to the minimum dimension

• According to maximum dimension

• According to diagonal dimension

Percentage = 2,50

Automatic dimension notes

Below this section, the user can decide which geometries will be noted with dimensions when
pressing the automatic dimension notes button: Horizontal, Vertical, Radius, Diameters.

Only one radius if there are several elements

If there are several equal radiuses, the system will only place dimension in one of them.

Only one diameter if there are several elements

The same as previous option but with diameters, if there are more than one equal diameters, only
one will be dimensioned.

Prompt for this data

171
Lantek Punch module

Every time the automatic dimension notes button is pressed, the system will show this dialogue
allowing to change the parameters before performing the operation.

Depending on the selection, the vertical and horizontal coordinates of the dimensions will be
calculated from the previous dimension coordinates (incremental) or be based on the selected
point on this section (absolute, in this case, based on the lower left corner of the part).

Modify dimension notes/Change data

Although the parameters configured here will be applied to the manual dimension notes, there are
parameters which have the same meaning in both sections. Please look the help about Font,
Percentage, Automatic Text, Dimension attributes (See page XXXXX) from the previous section
explanation.

Also with this option the user can modify the position of a defined dimension and if the parameter
"Prompt for text" (CAM / CAD Module / Utilities / Dimensions / Configure / Prompt for text) is
active, the text can also be modified.

Align

The dimensions will be aligned provided they are inside the given Tolerance (e.g. 20,00).

Center

The dimension text will be always aligned to the dimension.

Change data

Allows to change the data of the already placed dimensions. Changing data here and going
back to the drawing module will make the system to upgrade the dimensions to the new given
configuration.

Modify dimensions

172
Lantek Punch module

With this option, the user can select and move the dimension text of a part to the desired place
by dragging it manually.

Dimension size

With this option, the user can change the dimension size of the part and it will be reconstructed
according to the new size.

If the parametric part has variable dimensions (letter between brackets) when user select the
option 'Dimension size' a window with all the variable will be displayed for user to enter their
values.

Explode dimensions

This option allows the user to transform the dimensions geometry as not cut geometry.

1.8.4 Time and cost

The system provides a way for making the estimation of cost and time of the current job. This
option will not work properly unless the user makes the configurations in the Time calculation
(cutting (See page XXXX)or punching (See page XXXX)) and Cost calculation (cutting (See
page XXXX)or punching (See page XXXX)) sections of the machine configuration.

This value will only be used when creating the part. Once the part has been created, the material
cost will be calculated depending on the area type stored in the database for each part. This
value will be only changeable for the parts stored in the database

This option will show the different time and cost calculation screens, and it is also possible to
define the area (rectangular, real...) by default when creating a product.

1.8.5 Distance and angles

This option enables to check the distance and the angle between two points. Once the option is
selected, select the two points and the system will inform of the absolute distance (D), the
distance in X, the distance in Y and the angle (W) between the two points:

173
Lantek Punch module

1.8.6 Angle between three points

Shows the angle made by three points defined by the user:

174
Lantek Punch module

1.8.7 Verify part

Once the part has been designed it is recommended to use this option for being sure there are
not geometries which can cause problems in the machining. The system can be configured to
perform this verification every time the part is saved in Configure machines - Save option (See
page xxxxx).

This powerful option will analyze the whole part reporting any problematic situation like:

- Open contours

- Overlapped elements which would cause two cuts at the same place.

- Too large radius arcs for machines that can not make radiuses larger than a certain measure.

When the option is selected, the system prompts for the geometry to be verified. In that case, the
selection button bar (See page xxxxx) will be useful. The next step is to specify the maximum
radius that the machine can cut, in the case of found larger arcs, the length of the segment in
which the arc will be split and the technology.

With these data, the system will analyze the selected geometries showing the number of parts,
open and close contours.

Number of parts (e.g. 1)

Number of close contours (e.g. 5)

Number of open contours (e.g. 1)

175
Lantek Punch module

In this case there is one open contour. This is a big problem because the CAM module will not be
able to make the machining process correctly. The system provides two options for solving this:

Put points in open contours

If this checkbox is enabled, the system will insert points in the limits of the open contours,
according to the technology specified previously, showing the user where the problem is.

If the user has configured in SAVE DATA to Verify part while saving, this information will not be
asked and all the system will check all kind of contours.

Close open contours

But if the option is checked, then the system will close the open contour.

Tolerance (e.g. 0,50000): With this option the user can specify the tolerance for the Close open
contours.

Put points in small elements

This is an option to mark the small geometric elements with points while verifying a part. And this
allows the user to define whether points should be put or not on the small elements while
verifying a part. The system will show the 'Number of small elements' found in the part.

1.8.8 View geometry

This option allows the user to view the information of the selected geometry: Type of geometry,
Point or center. point coordinates, initial and final point coordinates, radius, element length and
initial and final angles. It also calculates the overall length of the geometry in meters.

Select geometry to verify

176
Lantek Punch module

Total perimeter = 0,207 m.

The previous example is for just one geometry (the arc), but the user can select as many
geometries as wanted, and the system will show the different lengths in the list:

Select geometry to verify

Total perimeter = 1,359 m.

The user can also print the viewed data pressing the button Print.

177
Lantek Punch module

1.8.9 Compare geometries

This option enables you to compare geometrices. This option allows comparing two drawings and
identifying the difference between them. If both geometrices are identical, the system will
displayed a message, otherwise the system will highlight the different elements.

1.8.10 Define limits

This option enables you to define the limits of the screen upon making a Zoom base. If you are
only interested in visualizing the part of the drawing between given limits, define the limits using
this option and then make a Zoom base (See page xxxxx).

1.8.11 View system status in drawing

1.8.11.1 Active tool

1.8.11.2 Used tools

1.8.11.3 Current turret

1.8.11.4 Current status

1.8.11.5 Verify the machining

1.8.11.6 Show the machining of a tool

1.8.11.1 Active tool

This option displays the operative punch data at that moment.

178
Lantek Punch module

1.8.11.2 Used tools

This option allows the user to view the list of punches used in machining. To do this the user
disposes of:

Angles

If this option is enabled, it will display a list of the punches, differentiating them according to the
different angles used.

Number of punching operations

If this option is validated, it will list the amount of performed punching operations for every punch,
indicating if they are nibbling punches or not:

Punches Angles No of
punch hits
RD-10 0.0 245
SQ-16 0.0 60
RE-40x5 90.0 284

1.8.11.3 Current turret

The current turret configuration will be shown in the screen with the different features of each
station. Also, the user can see what punches are placed in the turret in every moment.

When one punch is selected, clicking on the View button will make the system to show the
different parameters of the placed tool:

179
Lantek Punch module

1.8.11.4 Current status (punching)

It shows the system status: units, loading point, present point, Station (number of Multitool (if it is
0, it is not a Multitool station) and if it is Autoindex), tolerance or pitch of groovings and speed.
This is just information, and no parameters can be modified.

To gain access to speeds, press the button Feed Rates.

1.8.11.5 Verify the machining

With this option, the system will test that the machining process has been done properly looking
if:

- All the parts and contours are machined

- There are not overlapping between parts

- There are not leads, micro-joints, loops, etc, which overlaps with other elements

180
Lantek Punch module

The system will show a message with the result of the test showing where the error is, if any:

All machining on the sheet has been executed

And if the system finds any problem, it will show a warning message and will mark the
problematic zones with other color, and if the visualization is too small, with green points:

WARNING !
Not every machining of the sheet has been executed

The dark gray color contours means that the test has been successful.

1.8.11.6 Show machining of a tool

With this option, the system will present a list with all the used tools. If the user selects one, the
system will show only the machining of the selected tool. No machining instructions will be
deleted, this is just a visualization option.

For example:

181
Lantek Punch module

For showing again the machining of all the tools, the user must go back to this option and select
in the punches list <All>.

1.8.12 Select Machine

This option enables you to select the machine where the drawn part will be machined.

You can select one of the machines displayed in the list or create a new machine by clicking on
the New button (See New machine (See page XXXX))

NOTE: If no machine is assigned to the part when saving it (see Parts - Save (See page XXXX))
the system will request the name of the machine, in addition to other data.

1.8.13 Duct holes

This option enables you to manipulate the duct holes. These holes can be introduced in the
ducting figures see Introduce duct holes (See page XXXX).

The holes are defined by drawing them just like any other part. Take care in introducing the point
of origin (X = 0, Y = 0) on the point of the drawing that is to control the introduction of a hole in a
ducting figure.

182
Lantek Punch module

1.8.14 Machining macros

Creates, saves and erases machining macros.

A machining macro allows to make the machining of the interior of a part automatically in a
previously defined way.

For making it, the user has to make the machining of the interior as wanted using the manual
machining options using the desired tools, and save the macro.

When executing the automatic machining, the system will check the part interiors, and if one of
them coincide with existing macros, it will make the machining as defined in the macro (using the
same tools and techniques).

NOTE: This option will only work if it has been configured properly in the automatic machining
section (See page XXXX) of the machine configuration (Use punch macros, and Use punch
macros on standard holes options).

1.8.15 Remnants

Creates, modifies and erases remnants.

This option is specially designed for the exploitation of any remnant not created by the system.
Using it, the user can use the CAD module for drawing any shape and save it as a remnant which
will be used by the machining module for nesting.

Open a remnant generated by the user

The remnants which have been generated by the user can be edited in the drawing module using
this option.

Save the current remnant generated by the user

183
Lantek Punch module

It will save the current geometry as a remnant for being used in the nesting module. The system
will prompt for the main data (material, thickness...) and then will include it into the database.

Save the current remnant generated by the user with a new name

This option is a kind of "save as" options. In this case, the user can save the current remnant with
a different name and properties into the database.

Delete user remnants by selections

Clicking on this button will make the system to show all the remnants that have been generated
by the user with this options. It allows to remove the selected ones from the database.

1.8.16 Parametrics

Open, Save, Save as and Delete Parametric.

This option is specially designed for the exploitation of any parametric not created by the system.
Using it, the user can use the CAD module for drawing any shape and save it as a parametric
which will be used by the machining module for nesting.

Open

The parametric which have been generated by the user can be edited in the drawing module
using this option.

Save

It will save the current geometry as a parametric for being used in the nesting module. The
system will prompt for the main data (material, thickness...) and then will include it into the
database.

Save as

184
Lantek Punch module

In this case, the user can save the current parametric with a different name and properties into
the database.

Delete

Clicking on this button will make the system to show all the parametric that have been generated
by the user with this options. It allows to remove the selected ones from the database.

1.8.17 Customize

Toolbars

In this window there are different elements which allows to define or change the toolbars:

Bar = (e.g. New)

The configuration of the toolbar chosen here will be shown in the screen allowing to change it. If
the user selects the <New...>, then the system will prompt for the name and will create a new
toolbar.

For modification or creation of new toolbars, follow the steps below

1. Select the menu from where the option will be got (the list of the right side):
Menu
Parts
Geometry
Edit
Machining
Technology
View
Simulation
Utilities
Applications
?

2. The option list will change showing those from the selected menu:
Options
New
Open
Save

185
Lantek Punch module

Save as
Save by parts
Save all
.........................
Preview
Print....
Exit

3. Select the proper options and click on the arrow button, they will be included into the new
toolbar:
Options Bar
New... Parts\New...
Parts\Open
Open Parts\Save
Save Parts\Save
Save as as
Save by parts >
Save all
.......................
Preview
Print....
Exit

4. It is also possible to delete commands from the bar, for that select the option you want to
delete from the bar panel and click the Delete button.
5. The toolbar can have as many options are needed and they can be divided using the
Separator button:
Bar >Separator> Bar

Parts\New... Parts\New...
Parts\Open Parts\Open
Parts\Save Parts\Save
Parts\Save Parts\Save
as as
Parts\Save Parts\Save
all all
Parts\Print ......................
Parts\Preview Parts\Print
Edit/Undo Parts\Preview
View\XY Axis ......................
View\Zoom Edit/Undo
all View\XY Axis

The new toolbar will include a vertical line dividing the options as configured:

186
Lantek Punch module

Hide options

In this window there is a possibility to hide options and sub-options from the toolbars and menus.

There are 3 different options:

-Basic: Hides a predefined group of options.

-Advanced: Unhides all the options.

-Customized: The user can define which options will be hidden. This contains other four options
they are: Current machine, Machine of same type, All machine and Hide options in both modules.

Shortcut keys

The user can assign shortcut keys to any option or sub option. The shortcuts can consist on a
single key or on a combination of the keys Ctrl, Alt or Shift followed by any character.

1.9 Applications

1.9.1 Partial cut of a contour

1.9.2 Pallet

187
Lantek Punch module

1.9.1 Partial cut of a contour

With this option, the user can cut only part of a contour in cutting and combinated machines.

The part of new contour to be cut will be defined dynamically with the snap mode.

When selecting this option, the system will display the cutting direction. If after selecting the in it
point, you click the right mouse button, the cutting direction will be inverted.

1.9.2 Pallet

1.10 ?

1.10.1 Contents

1.10.2 Context

1.10.3 User editor

1.10.4 About

1.10.1 Contents

This document contains information and help about the CAD/CAM sections of the system.
Please, select the desired section for getting help:

Introduction

System units

Work center

CAM

188
Lantek Punch module

1.10.2 Context

Use this button to get help on any program option. Simply push the button and then click on the
program aspect you would like help with, either a button or a menu option. If the aspect indicated
by the user is not specifically covered in the help files the system will display an error message.

1.10.3 User editor

This option enables you to access a file editor to edit any text file, for example CNC files
generated by the system.

1.10.4 About

This option informs you of the version of the program, the license and series number and the
memory available.

189
Lantek Punch module

2 CAM MODULE - PUNCHING

Introduction

The nesting and machining module is the area of the program which is most directly related to the
final machining of the part. It is in charge of the right positioning of the parts in the sheet and
calculating the machining sequence and creating the CNC program among other things.

In order to gain access to the nesting and machining module, select the option Nesting and
machining in the menu Parts or press the corresponding button in the buttons bar. While going
into the nesting module, the status bar will display a progress and information bar of the part that
is being processed.

Title bar

The title bar in the nesting and cutting screen is used to identify the work in progress at any time.
The three factors which define a particular job (machine, material and thickness) are viewed in
the center of the title bar.

Drawing window

The drawing window is located in the center of the cutting and nesting screen. This is is the
drawing operative area where the nesting and machining of sheets can be viewed.

Status bar

The status bar continually provides information on the coordinates of the cursor (on the right) and
the actions that can be performed (on the left). This is very useful whenever an option is carried
out in different steps, since it informs you of the actions to be performed at each stage.

For example, when the cursor is placed over a button, the status bar shows information about the
action this button will execute.

191
Lantek Punch module

Quantity of equal sheets to be done: when the system detects that the same sheet has to be
machined twice, it will send the same CNC code twice to the machine. In that case, this number
will indicate the number of times that this CNC code is going to be executed.

Sheets dimension: those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet

Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the nested
parts.

Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, is the size that the nested parts occupied in the
remnant. In the example the value is the same as previous one because all the sheet is being
used, not only a remnant.

Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will arrive.
For example: although the loaded sheet is 4000x2000, with a 3658x1980 sheet is enough for
cutting all the parts.

Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.

CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file which will not be generated until the job is saved.

2.1 Jobs

2.2 Nesting

2.3 Sheets

2.4 Machining

2.5 Technology

192
Lantek Punch module

2.6 View

2.7 Simulation

2.8 Utilities

2.9 Applications

2.10 ?

2.1 Jobs

2.1.1 Open

2.1.2 Next

2.1.3 Previous

2.1.4 Save

2.1.5 New part

2.1.6 Main program

2.1.7 Drawing

2.1.8 Print

2.1.9 Exit

193
Lantek Punch module

2.1.1 Open

The manufacturing order will be divided into different jobs which will include all the parts made
with the same material and thickness for one machine.

From this option of the menu, the system will show all the jobs of the current manufacturing order
into a list allowing the user to select one for being opened and edited.

New: Using this option the user can create a new subjob without any part on an order. To open
this new subjob, you only have to define a machine, material and thickness. The parts can be
imported directly on the sheet.

2.1.2 Next

This option allows to go through the jobs following a creation order. Every time this option is
selected the next job in the list becomes the current job.

If the option is disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is the last
one, or the order have just one job.

2.1.3 Previous

This option allows to go through the jobs following a creation order. Every time this option is
selected the prevoius job in the list becomes the current job.

If the option is disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is the last
one, or the order have just one job.

2.1.4 Save

This option allows to save all the jobs from the current manufacturing order. The sheet that is
going to be saved will appear in the status bar.(See page XXXXX).

194
Lantek Punch module

With this (PROTECTED) option the user is allowed to automatically generate a text file with many
machining and nesting information. This application uses the as template the file FMecData.tem,
where the user can define the information and the format to write this output. A detailed
explanation of the available information and how to define the format can be found on
FMecData.DOC file

2.1.5 New part

This option allows to create rectangular parts from nesting module with shear technology. While
the user is defining the part, user will be able to place in a sheet with the same dimensions. It is
no necessary to have any part in the job to run this option.

This option is only available for punching and/or combinated machines.

2.1.6 Main program

This option allows to return to the main screen, without closing the nesting module. If changes
have been made, the system will ask to save the changes before returning to the main screen.

If the user returns to the nesting module later, the situation will be the same as before. If the user
wants to abandon the module closing it, see option Jobs - Exit.(See page XXXXX).

2.1.7 Go to the drawing module

This option will open the drawing module without closing the nesting ones. If the system detects
changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt for saving them.

If the user performs changes in the drawing module, then the system will ask to save them before
going back to the nesting module.

The system will return to the previous state when returning to the nesting module. If the user
wants to leave and close the nesting module, the correct option is Jobs - Exit.(See page XXXXX).

The Drawing Module (See page XXXXX).

195
Lantek Punch module

2.1.8 Print /Preview

The system will generate the job worksheet with the following information:
• Sheet Reference
• Order name, date and time
• CNC file name
• Sheet dimensions
• Nesting representation
• Machine, Material, Weight, Height, Percent of used sheet, Remnant
• Total time
• Supplier, Transporter
• Part References

The information will be shown in a box which depends on the configuration made for each
machine in Work Centers - Utilities - Configure Machines - General properties - Boxes (See page
XXXXX).

There are different parameters to configure the printing in Nesting - Utilities - Configure Draw and
Nest - Print (See page XXXXX). section.

The boxes which are part of the list can be parameterized, lines thickness, position and
dimension of the drawings, text format and database fields. To define a new box, contact the
product

196
Lantek Punch module

2.1.9 Exit

This option allows to abandon the nesting module and return to the main module. If the system
detects changes in the job, it will prompt for save them.

Also see Return to the main screen and Go to the drawing module (See page XXXXX).

2.2 Nesting

2.2.1 Do all

2.2.2 Active subjob

2.2.3 One sheet

2.2.4 One window

2.2.5 Semiautomatic

2.2.6 Place

2.2.7 Modules

2.2.8 Fitted

2.2.9 Move

2.2.10 Place near

2.2.11 Fit

2.2.12 Copy

2.2.13 Delete

2.2.14 Collisions

2.2.15 Import

2.2.16 Export

197
Lantek Punch module

2.2.1 Do all

This option automatically performs all the jobs of the manufacturing order. It will nest and
machine all the parts of every job if the amount of sheets for every job allows it.

The way of working is:

1. Execute an automatic nesting for the current job using the configuration made in Automatic
Nesting section of the cutting (See page XXXXX) or punching (See page XXXXX)machine.
Click on the link for help about it.

2. Execute the automatic machining for all the part nested by the previous operation, using the
configuration made in the machine configuration - Automatic machining dialogue which is
different if is a cutting (See page XXXXX) or punching (See page XXXXX) machine.

3. Go to the next job of the manufacturing order and repeat the process until all the jobs has
been correctly finished.

2.2.2 Active subjob

With this option to "Machine every sheet" and "Machine active subjob". This option allows
performing the machining of all and only the nested sheet and machining the active sub job.

If any sheet was previously machined, the system will allow keeping the previous machining or
redoing the previous machining.

2.2.3 One sheet

Once a sheet has been selected from the Sheets - New (See page XXXXX) option of the menu,
using this command and depending on the configuration made on the automatic nesting section
of the machine configuration (cutting - punching (See page XXXXX) ), the system will insert into
the sheet as many parts as possible:

198
Lantek Punch module

See an example of how to use the nesting options(See page XXXXX)

2.2.4 One window

With this option, the user can perform a nesting inside a window. The system defines a window
from its upper-left and lower-right corners, and the system will make the nesting of the parts
inside.

For example, in the following sheet:

With this nesting feature, is easy to define a window for inserting more parts:

199
Lantek Punch module

The result is that the system performs the nesting inside the defined window:

The way this nesting will be done depends on the following parameters configuration:

Type

All: The system will use all the parts of the job for the nesting inside the window

Part selection: The system will make the nesting inside the window only with the selected part.

First point

When doing the window, the system needs two points (upper-left and lower-right corners).
Depending on the option selected here, the first point can be got from an useful one:

Picked point: Both corners of the window will be set up by the points with the mouse.

200
Lantek Punch module

Corner of the sheet: The first point will be got from the lower left corner of the sheet, and the
second will be the one clicked with the mouse.

Fit the sheet to the window: The sheet format can be changed using this option.

If enabled, the system will change the sheet data adjusting to the created window. For example, if
enabled, with the window of the left, the sheet will be changed like on the right figure:

Corner of the nesting: In this case, the first point will be get from the defined automatic nesting
beginning corner. See the help of this parameter for cutting (See page XXXXX) / punching (See
page XXXXX) machine.

Nesting method

How the nesting will be done inside the window can be configured here:

-Rectangular

-True Shape

The help of each method can be read in the automatic nesting configuration (See page XXXXX) .

201
Lantek Punch module

2.2.5 Modules

The modules are groups of parts which will be treated as a single one when doing the nesting.
When the system performs an automatic nesting process, it will calculate which group of parts are
the best to place together for optimizing the sheet use.

Create

This options provides a way for creating these modules manually following the steps:
1. Place in the sheet in manual or semiautomatic, the part combination which will form the
module. In the example, the combination of these parts results in a very good sheet usage:

2. Once the parts have been placed, select the Modules - Create option and then all the parts.
They will disappear from the sheet and will be included into the modules list:

3. When doing the automatic nesting, the system will compare the modules created by the user
with the created by the systems, and will use those which provides the best sheet usage. In
the example, the system places the manually created module:

202
Lantek Punch module

The user can create as many modules as needed.

Block

The system will not use the blocked modules. The way of doing this is just selecting them from
the list and use the block button, an 'X' will appear on the left side.

Place

This button works like the Place button of the nesting but with modules instead of parts. If the
user selects one module from the list and click the Place button, the system will try to nest the
entire module once in the sheet (if there is space available).

Semiautomatic

Pressing this button will make the system to place automatically the best module depending on
the current sheet nesting. It will only place one module each time the button is pressed.

Delete

This operation will delete the selected module from the list.

Explode

Once the module has been placed on the sheet there is no option for deleting just one part of the
module, if trying, the system will delete the whole module. This option allows to ungroup the parts
from the selected module, so that the user can work with parts independently.

Insert

203
Lantek Punch module

This option acts with the module in the same way as if the user selects one part from the Parts
List and place it on the sheet. Allows to place manually the entire module in the sheet with the
mouse.

2.2.6 Fitted

With this option user can place or adjust a part on the best sheet. The user must click using the
mouse on the part where placing or adjusting is going to take place and this will be automatically
nested.
This option the user can "nest" a part on a sheet with the best possible yield. the system will
place only one part but as many times as possible to fit the sheet.

The user can configure:

-Use sheet margins: Allows to nest on sheet margins.

-Sheet dimensions tolerances: Distance that parts can be out of the sheet.

2.2.7 Move parts in the nesting

This option allows the user to move and or rotate a group of parts previously nested in a sheet.
To do this, the user must select the group of parts (see elements selection buttons bar (See page
XXXX)), and define a reference point for the selected group. At that moment, the group of parts
will move along with the mouse (the mouse becomes the reference point):

204
Lantek Punch module

Once the group is selected and the system is asking for the reference point, a window will appear
showing options for the rotation of the selected group (see rotation buttons bar). The group can
also rotate if the user keeps the right button pressed. At this moment the reference point does not
move and the circular motion of the mouse rotates the whole group. To stop rotating, do not press
the right button of the mouse.

Once the movement and or rotation is finished clicking the mouse will release the group:

205
Lantek Punch module

2.2.8 Place near

From this option the user can access to different manual nesting possibilities which allow to
attach a part or a group of parts with other parts in a specific way:

This option attaches the source and target elements in parallel mode:

After this, the system will ask for the distance between the initial and final element:

This option attaches the source and the target elements in perpendicular mode:

206
Lantek Punch module

After the selections, the system prompts for the distance between the elements:

Value = 25,0000 mm

This option is a generalization of the two previous ones. It allows to attach a source to a target
element but not only with parallel or perpendicular motion. It literally attaches the top-bottom or
right-left area of the source element to the top-bottom or right-left area of the target element.
When the user selects the initial and final elements, it is important the side of the geometry where
is clicked.

207
Lantek Punch module

As with the previous options, the system needs the distance:

Value = 25.00000 mm

With this option the user can attach two parts but instead of taking only the sides, it will use the
clicked points:

In this case, the system will not only get the sides, it will use the clicked points and the distance
given after them for moving the part:

208
Lantek Punch module

Value = 25.00000 mm

This option allows to attach a circular element to two target elements which are perpendicular.
This can be done establishing the initial and final elements:

And the tangent element and the distance:

209
Lantek Punch module

Attaches the imaginary lower-left vertex of the minimum rectangle of the part to a defined point.

2.2.9 Adjust nesting to the sheet

This option adjusts a nesting to one of the sides of a sheet. The user must click using the mouse
near the side of the sheet where adjusting is going to take place and this will be automatically
nested.

2.2.10 Copy parts

This option allows the user to copy a group of nested parts in nesting, after choosing this option
the user should select the parts from the sheet (see element selection button bar (See page
XXXXX)).

210
Lantek Punch module

Copy type

There are different options for making the copies:

Window: The copies of the selected parts will be placed in an user-defined window.

Visualize: When drawing the rectangle, the system will show the possible result in every moment
if this option is enabled.

Horizontal (e.g. 10,000) and vertical separation (e.g. 10,000) :These are the separation between
parts which will be used when making the copies. The meaning of these values will change
depending on the parameter.

Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal rectangle
of the parts.

211
Lantek Punch module

Copy by rectangles (enabled)

Disabled, the distance between one part corner to next part corner:

Copy by rectangles (disabled)

Copy with the part technology on sheet: Using this option, the copies will be made including the
applied technology to the original parts (leads, microjoints...)

Copy with the part machining on sheet: Also, if this has been enabled, the copies will be made
including the machining.

Multiple

Just after selecting the part(s) to copy, the user should click with the mouse where to make
copies, or input the coordinates.

Grid

With this option, the user can make copies of the selected parts in a grid disposition starting from
the initial part position, going in the copy direction making the horizontal and vertical specified
copies (limited by the number of available parts).

212
Lantek Punch module

If the horizontal and vertical copies value is 0, the system will insert as many parts as possible
until arriving to the sheet limits and there are available parts.

Depending on the horizontal and vertical separations and the value of the parameter copy by
rectangles, the distance between the parts will be different. See the help of this parameters (See
page XXXXX).

And also the copies can maintain the original machining and technology depending on these
parameters (See page XXXXX)..

For example, there is one part placed on the sheet with leads in-out and with the machining. With
the configuration specified in the right:

The result is that the system will insert as many parts as possible following the copy direction and
copying the machining:

Multitorch

213
Lantek Punch module

If the machine has been configured as multitorch (cutting machine), then this option will appear
trying to make the copies using the maximum number of torches possible.

The first parameter to configure is the copy direction, in this case only two can be chosen.

To pack: Enabled, when clicking on automatic button the system will calculate the minimum
distance between parts

Automatic: If the parameter is disabled, then the system will get the values for the torches
distances given here:
Number of torches 4
Distance between 48,000
torches
Number of columns 4
Distance between 886,600
columns

For example, with the previous configuration and with To pack active, the result is:

But if To pack is disabled, then the system will get the distance between torches from here:
Number of torches 4
Distance between 500,000
torches
Number of columns 4
Distance between 886,600
columns

214
Lantek Punch module

For this, the distance between parts now is 500:

Copy with the part technology on sheet

Using this option, the copies will be made including the applied technology to the original parts.

Preview

With this button, the system will show how the copy will be made with the current configuration of
the different parameters.

2.2.11 Delete parts in nesting

This option allows the user to delete parts nested on a sheet. To do this the user only has to
select the parts to be deleted (see element selection buttons bar (See page XXXXX)):

215
Lantek Punch module

2.2.12 Collision control

With this option the user can enable or disable the part collision control for manual nesting. If it is
activated the user will not be able to nest a part which overlaps an already nested part. The
system will respect the distance between parts in semiautomatic or manual nesting operations.
Although the user tries to place one part inside other, the system will move it until the correct
distance.

For example, once these two parts have been nested, the user is trying to nest one more part:

The result depends on the state of the collision control:

Disabling the collision control may be useful in some cases. For example, with a part whose
length is 1985 mm in X, and the sheet is 2000 mm in X, and the margin of this sheet is 10 mm for
each side. In this case, the system will not place the part automatically because it doesn't fit in the
sheet (the margins doesn't allow it). For solving this, the part can be placed disabling the collision
control and placing it manually leaving just 7,5 mm of margin for each side.

2.2.13 Import

With this option, the user can loads a previously saved nesting in the active order (as stored or
normal nesting).

216
Lantek Punch module

Steps to import a nesting:

1.Select the nesting type (stored nesting or other nesting of the data base).

2.Select the nesting from the table and enter the number of sheets to import in the quantity
column. If you select the “Load nesting data” checkbox the drawing would be shown indicating
whether the nesting is or not machined. The references of the parts included in the nesting, as
well as, the quantity of nested parts appear in the “Parts list” table. When you select a row in this
table, the system shows the image of the selected part.

3.The following conflict situations could arise:

Not enough parts in job: The part or parts involved in nesting appear highlighted in the pats table.
To enable the OK button and be able to import the nesting it is necessary to select the “Add
parts” option. This adds to the job the necessary parts before importing.

217
Lantek Punch module

Not enough sheets in database: The nesting or nestings involved appear highlighted in the
nesting table. To enable the OK button and be able to import the nesting it is necessary to select
one of the following options: “Add sheets” or “Create sheets”. If the first option is selected, the
system will adds to the database the required quantity of sheets before importing. If the Create
new sheets option is selected, the system shows, before importing the nesting, a sheet creation
window with the sheet dimensions.

Machined: If the selected nesting is machined and the “Load nesting data” option is activated, the
system displays a label indicating this situation and two new options: “Delete existing machining”
and “Regenerate”. By selecting any of them the system performs the corresponding operation on
the selected nesting before importing it to the order. The “Regenerate” option includes “Delete the
machining”.

It is possible to make filters on the Nesting list by using the “Criteria” option. The fields over which
it is possible to filter are as follows:

218
Lantek Punch module

The parts lists allow you to indicate that you want to view the nestings which contain the parts of
the list in the right and with the specified quantity. The list on the left side initially shows all the
parts of the job, and, by default, it shows all the nestings that contain any of these parts and any
that is not in the list.

By selecting the “Import nestings from database” option, the nesting list is reloaded showing all
the nestings that observe the selected criteria. In this case it is possible to select, from the criteria
window, any job in the database that has at least one of the parts of the active job.

2.2.14 Export

With this option, the user can saves the active Nesting as “Stored nesting” with the difference
given by the user. These nestings could be imported at any order, and it could also be used in the
“Do all” method as we will see later.

219
Lantek Punch module

2.3 Sheets

2.3.1 New

2.3.2 Go to

2.3.3 Next

2.3.4 Previous

2.3.5 Delete

2.3.6 Unblock

2.3.7 Delete every part

2.3.8 Change data

2.3.9 Change quantity

2.3.10 Remnants

2.3.11 Multitorch

2.3.12 View CNC

2.3.1 New

The system displays a list of sheets and scraps (marked with 'X' in the Remnant column)
applicable to the active job (current material and thickness), according to some defined viewing
criteria (See page XXXX).

To select a new sheet or scrap, just double-click on the selected one, click on the related drawing
or press the button OK, which will be deactivated if the number of selected sheets and scraps is
0.

The columns Suppliers, Transporter and Comment show the data of the identifiers that have been
defined by the user. And an additional a horizontal scroll bar to be able to view all the columns

220
Lantek Punch module

Length Width Quantity Reference Remnant Block Suppliers Transporter Comment

1.000,000 500,000 1 9

4.000,000 2.500,000 1 Ref1111

2.000,000 1.600,000 1 S-07 X

900,162 1.500,000 1 T-08 X

Add

With this button, the user can add quantities of a previously defined sheet. Just select the sheet
from the list, click the button and input the number of sheets to add.

Remove

Removes a number of a previously defined sheet. For making this, select the sheet from the list,
click this button and input the number of sheets to subtract to the current quantity. If the resulting
quantity is 0, the system will delete the sheet from the database.

Create

Creates a new sheet using the current job's material and thickness.

If "Automatic sheet reference" option is enabled in (Utilities/Configuration/CAM

configuration/Auxiliar/Automatic sheet references),

when clicking on the three point button () the system displays the window to define the format of
the automatic references.

When defining the format, the user can combine the value of the fields Material, Thickness, length
and Width of the sheets. the value Length and Width can be displayed as divided by 10 and by
100.

If this option is enabled and a format is defined, when creating a sheet, the reference will be
automatically rewritten each time any of the fields Material, Thickness, length or Width is
modified.

There are some parameters related to the new sheet which should be filled:

Reference (e.g. W): This is the reference for the sheet. The system will show the name given
here always in the sheets list.

221
Lantek Punch module

Length (e.g. 2.000,000) and width (e.g. 1.500,000): Also, the system needs the length and width.

Quantity (e.g. 1): And the quantity of sheets to include into the database.

Priority/Block: The system provides two parameters for configure how each sheet will be used in
the automatic process (like in Do All). The user can assign a priority to the sheet. Those whose
priority value is higher will be used the first when doing the Do all process automatically.

Also, if the sheet has been blocked, it will not be used in automatic processes until is unblocked
again.

The previous data must be filled for creating the sheet.

Complementary data: But the user can input complementary data which will increase the
information about the sheets.

-Supplier

-Transporter

-Comment

Block

When one sheet is blocked, it won't be used when using the Do All process.

Criteria

Using this option, the user will be able to use and save the selected sheet criteria on nesting
level. In previous version, all the parameters configured in this screen were not saved for the next
nesting. from now on the system will store these criteria.

And using this the user can define what sheets will be shown in the list. It is important to check
the configuration made here because some sheets may not be included in the list and they
appear to be removed when the problem is that the criteria doesn't coincide with them.

In the text fields there is one special character which can be used as a filter for showing in the list.
The character is the "%", and, for example it can be used in Reference field:

2% - All the references whose first character is '2' (2111, 222Ref...)

%334% - All the references which contains the '334' number inside. (Ref334, 013349...)

222
Lantek Punch module

2.3.2 Go to

This option allows to go through the different sheets and scraps used in active job. It displays a
list with all the used sheets:

Display drawing

Enabled, the system will show the nesting of the selected sheet.

New

With this button the user can insert a new sheet in the current job. The system will show the new
sheet window. (See page XXXX)

2.3.3 Next

With this option it is possible to advance to the next sheet or scrap used in the active job.

2.3.4 Prevoius

With this option it is possible to go back to the previous sheet or scrap used in active job.

2.3.5 Delete

All the sheets of the active job or of the jobs of the order can be removed. To do this, select the
desired option (below) and press the OK button.

- The current sheet

- Every sheet of the job

223
Lantek Punch module

- Every sheet of the order

2.3.6 Unblock

It is Possible for the user to unblock from the Cam module nesting which are in workshop and/or
office.

- In office: The nesting must not be exploded.

- In workshop: The nesting must not be exploded.

To turn this option ON the following parameter must be active: Action list/Work Center
Configuration/General/ Allow to unblock sheet in the office or in the workshop.

2.3.7 Delete every part

This option allows to remove all the parts from the current sheet, from all the sheets or the job or
from all the sheets of the order, without removing the sheets of the job. To do this, select the
desired option and press the OK button:

- The current sheet

- Every sheet of the job

- Every sheet of the order

2.3.8 Change data

This option allows to modify the margin and dimensions of the current sheet, of all the sheets of
the job, or of all the sheets of the order, as well as some parameters such as: supplier, carrier or
linked comment.

The steps to follow are:

Specify what sheets to change:

The current sheet

224
Lantek Punch module

Every sheet of the job

Every sheet of the order
Select the parameters to modify:

If the modification is properly made, press OK button. If the modifications are not going to be
operative, press Cancel button.

2.3.9 Change quantity

This option displays a table where the user can view the current amount of sheets and the
maximum amount that can be assigned, depending on the number of sheets left to place and the
number of sheets available in stock. The user will specify the number of equal sheets, taking into
account the specified maximum limit.

When this option is selected, the system will verify:

Available parts from the parts list for making another equal sheet
Available sheets
If equal sheets can be done, the system will generate one CNC but will increase the times this
CNC must be done in the work sheet.

For example, if there is a sheet with 25 parts placed, and there are still 50 more parts available.
The system will verify the number of available parts and available sheets, if there two more
sheets available, then the user can decide to make the same CNC twice more resulting in the
machining of the 75 parts into the three sheets. (3 times the same CNC of the 25 parts):

Current 1
quantity
Maximum 3
quantity
New quantity 3

225
Lantek Punch module

And if clicking on OK, the first number of the status bar will change to '3', this information means
that the current sheet should be done three times.

2.3.10 Remnants

Using this option, the user can define and store in the database the remaining space of the sheet
after the nesting has been done as a remnant.

After the nesting has been done, with the following steps the user can define how the remnant will
be generated and stored in the database:
1. Define the edge of the remnant. This can be done automatically using the parameters of the
Remnant Configuration and clicking on automatic edge (See page XXXX) button. Or
manually using the draw the edge button (See page XXXX) .

2. When the user tries to delete a nested sheet, which has a remnant, which has been used in
any other nesting, the system will display a warning as
"The sheet has remnants that have been used"
"Do you want to go on, anyway?"

This warning will also be display if any used remnant of the sheet is going to be deleted or
regenerated.
3. Generate the remnant

2.3.10.1 Draw the edge

2.3.10.2 Draw the exact edge

2.3.10.3 Automatic edge

2.3.10.4 Delete the edge

2.3.10.5 Create remnant

2.3.10.6 Delete the remnant

2.3.10.7 Remnant reference

226
Lantek Punch module

2.3.10.8 Rotate remnant

2.3.10.9 Configure

2.3.10.1 Remnant line (manual)

This option allows to draw a polyline using dots and arcs for limiting the remnant. In order for the
remnant to be valid, the polyline must start and finish in the external area of the sheet. It must
also meet some requirements such as minimum area and not trespassing the cutting margins of
the parts.

To draw a polyline:
1. Define it as a dot or arc.

2. Select a point and follow the status bar instructions. The type of element (dot or arc) can be
changed at any movement.

3. To finish, press the button ESC.

For example, with the following nesting:

For drawing the remnant line manually, the user should click on the first button of the remnant
toolbar and draw the line from the outside to the sheet. The Orthogonal option is very useful for
drawing straight lines:

227
Lantek Punch module

The system will consider the created line as valid when the ESC key is pressed. After that, the
creation of the remnant is as easy as clicking on the Create Remnants button:

2.3.10.2 Remnant line (Draw the exact edge)

With this option user can create in semiautomatic a remnant line between parts.

This new option allows to create a remnant drawing manually cutting lines between the gaps
created when cutting the parts.

228
Lantek Punch module

The first and the last point of the remnant must be placed out of the sheet.

In each part must be defined two points (entry point and exit point).

2.3.10.3 Remnantline (automatically)

Depending on the settings made on the machine's sheet remnant configuration section (See
page XXXX), the system will draw the remnant line automatically if the user clicks on this button.

For example, with the following configuration:

And with the following nesting, the result is:

229
Lantek Punch module

Once the edge has been drawn, it is easy to create the remnant using the automatic option:

2.3.10.4 Delete remnant line

This option removes all the remnant lines generated in the sheets, if these are not machined:

If the remnant has been already generated, the correct option for deleting it is Delete the remnant
(See page XXXX).

230
Lantek Punch module

2.3.10.5 Generate automatic remnant

This option generates remnants automatically depending on the configuration made on the
machine's sheet remnant configuration section (See page XXXX) . The remnant will not be
generated if:
1. The remnant line is not drawn. The system will automatically draw it if the Generate remnant
line automatically option has been selected in the remnant configuration.

2. The piece of sheet which is going to be remnant is smaller than the minimum area for
remnant (See page XXXX) parameter in the remnant configuration.
For example, with the Generate remnant line automatically enabled, the system will create the
following remnant from the sheet:

At the moment the sheet is saved, the new remnant will be included into the sheet list for being
used in future jobs.

The remnant limit is generated with a white line, not machined unless the remnant line (See page
XXXX) is generated.

2.3.10.6 Delete remnant

This option allows the user to delete the remnants generated in a sheet. To do this, the user must
select the remnants to be deleted (see selecting elements button bar (See page XXXX)).

For example, for deleting the following remnant:

231
Lantek Punch module

After clicking on the delete remnant button, the remnant must be selected and it will be
automatically deleted:

For deleting the remnant line, the correct option is Delete the edge (See page XXXX).

2.3.10.7 Remnant reference

These are two points that are defined, in order to reference the remnant in the machine. For
example, with the following interior remnant:

232
Lantek Punch module

Because this remnant has no rectangular shape, when going to place it in the table it is very
difficult to adjust the placed position in the sheet with the position where the nesting has been
done in the program. This option allows to solve this giving two reference points which are going
to be stored in the database together with the remnant:

The system will get these two points and will be kept when saving the remnant:

The way of using the given reference is to use the remnant and make the nesting:

Now, using the Machining - Modify real references of the remnant (See page XXXX) the user
should give the real distances between the starting point and the previously defined 1 and 2
points references:

P1 {X (e.g. 300,000),Y (e.g. 900,000)} ; P2 {X (e.g. 550,000),Y (e.g. 320,000)}.

233
Lantek Punch module

By this way, the system will adapt the coordinates getting the same orientation as the placed over
the sheet remnant.

2.3.10.8 Rotate remnant

With this option you can flip a remnant (in X or Y axis) or rotate it a defined angle (the angle must
be multiple of 900). to execute this option the sheet must be a remnant and it has to contain No
geometry.

2.3.10.9 Sheet Remnants

With this option you can configure parameters for a machine’s Remnant data section.

When the machining for a sheet only takes up small part of the total area (normally this happens
with the last sheet of a nest), sometimes there is a piece of the sheet we are interested in keeping
for future use, this is referred as a remnant. The system can automatically generate these
remnants and manage them in the database. This is very useful when the user want to use one of
these remnants for another order.

The system can be configured to recognize these remnants and store them in the sheets
database when saving the nest.

Generate remnants when you save

Enabling this function, the system will automatically generate a remnant for the current sheet
when saving. There are two ways to generate a remnant. The first one is to use the original sheet
taking away the machined areas. The second method adds one or more cut lines creating
remnants for the remaining areas.

234
Lantek Punch module

Generate remnants with the completed sheets

The system will keep on the database the whole sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is
useful if the sheet has been machined with a few parts and is better not to cut it for remnants. The
user can get this sheet for nesting and machining more parts taking advantage of the remaining
space of the sheet.

Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically

This function allows to generate remnants following the options shown in the bitmaps. For
example, with this nesting.

Each option will generate different number of remnants (in blue) and different remnant shape (in
green).

235
Lantek Punch module

In the remnant shape with "?" letter, is the system who decides what kind of remnant will create
depending on the area value.

All the shapes and cutting lines depends on the values of the offset between the parts and the
lines, the minimum width of hollows and the minimum area of the remnant.

Using "Remnants / Automatic edge" option, user is allowed to generate an automatic remnant line
using the notches defined in Y-axis. This option allows optimizing the sheet to be used as
remnant.

Minimum X and Minimum Y: The system will not create a smaller remnant than the configure
values for X and Y. If the remnant is smaller, the system will use these values to create the
remnant. This option is only valid for the 6 firsts options on the menu.

Offset between the parts and the line (e.g. 10,000)

236
Lantek Punch module

This value will determine the distance between the remnant's cutting line and every part nested
on the sheet.

Minimum width of hollows (e.g. 10,000)

The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little space of the sheet which is
between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.

Round the remnant line and radius

With this option the user can round the remnant line automatically when it is generated. The first
parameter allows to active this option and the second one asks the value for the round radius.
This option is also available for combined machines.

Delete the remnant area around parts

With this parameter disabled, the system will use as remnant any area of the sheet including
those which are inside parts like holes. If the user doesn't want to use these areas, this parameter
must be enabled.

Minimum area of remnants (e.g. 0,500m2)

237
Lantek Punch module

The value of this parameter is going to be used for generating remnants always biggers that the
given square meters.

Remnants can be rotated

The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this parameter enabled, the system will
look for the best position of the remnant for placing the cutting head (from-point) of the machine
into the sheet.

For example: From the sheet of the right, the remnant of the left has been generated.

The from-point is on the upper-left side of the sheet, now if the remnant is placed in the same
angle, it is going to be very difficult to place the head of the machine just in this point. It would be
easier if the remnant is placed turned. If this is enabled, the system will look for the best position
of the remnant.

This window can be updated in the nesting module for each sheet with Sheets -> Remnants ->
Scraps.

Prompt for references when generating remnants

238
Lantek Punch module

The system generates a reference automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is
enabled, at the moment of generating a new remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the
reference.

2.3.12 View CNC

Shows the CNC code of the sheet. The nesting has to be saved, in order to generate the CNC
code.

2.4 Machining

2.4.1 Initialize

2.4.2 Rapid

2.4.3 Goto

2.4.4 Contours

2.4.5 Simple cycle

2.4.6 Linear cycle

2.4.7 Circular cycle

2.4.8 Grid cycle

2.4.9 Irregular cycle

2.4.10 Automatic

2.4.11 Modify

2.4.12 Optimize

2.4.13 Delete instructions

239
Lantek Punch module

2.4.1 Initialize

Initializes the machining. This operation must be done always before making any machining
operation. When the button has been pressed, the system performs several operations which
make possible to start the use of the machine:
• Apply the settings configured on machine's startup configuration section (See page XXXX).

• Place the clamps as configured on machine's sheet clamps configuration section (See page
XXXX). .

• Initialize the work zone as set up on machine's work zone configuration section (See page
XXXX). .

• Initialize the from-point as configured on the from-point configuration section (See page
XXXX). .

• The system will show the upload/download configuration if enabled on machine's

upload/download sheets configuration section (See page XXXX). .

• Apply the configured punching parameters (for punching machines) (See page XXXX). or
the cutting parameters (See page XXXX). (for cutting machines)

• Apply the general machine options (See page XXXX). .

When using any of the automatic machining options, the system will begin always with the
initialize process.

2.4.2 Rapid

A Rapid movement is a displacement of the head without cutting. Using this option, the user can
insert a rapid movement from the current machining coordinates to the desired point (clicking with
the mouse or using the keyboard for giving the coordinates):

240
Lantek Punch module

The system will go inserting rapid movements to the prompted points until the ESC key is
pressed.

2.4.3 Contours

2.3.4.1 Contours in nesting and machining (punching)

2.3.4.2 Contours in nesting and machining (punching with shear)

2.4.3.1 Contours in nesting and machining (punching)

2.4.3.1.1 Punch/Cut set of selected parts

2.4.3.1.2 Machining inside in automatic mode

2.4.3.1.3 Punching outside in automatic mode

2.4.3.1.4 Edging by nibbling

2.4.3.1.5 Edging by extraction

2.4.3.1.6 Edging by pocketing

2.4.3.1.7 Total edging

2.4.3.1.8 Machining inside in manual mode

2.4.3.1.9 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch

241
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.10 Punch outside in manual mode

2.4.3.1.11 Extractions of machined parts

2.4.3.1.12 Finish off the corners

2.4.3.1.13 Punch remnants line

2.4.3.1.14 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode

2.4.3.1.15 Punch the whole work zone

2.4.3.1.16 Punch vertical outside in manual mode

2.4.3.1.17 Punch horizontal outside in manual mode

2.4.3.1.18 Machining scrap line

2.4.3.1.1 Punch/Cut set of selected parts

This option is used for machine contours. this option allow to machine all holes and/or all mark
geometry (inkjet or not) of the selected parts by window or clicking.

Make on:

The selected part

Identical parts with the same angle

Identical parts

Machining....:

The part (including holes and marks)

Holes

Marks

242
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.2 Machining inside in automatic mode

This option allows to machine automatically the interior elements of the nested parts. For making
this, the user should select first which parts to machine:

Parts

This option machines the interior contours of the parts selected by the user (see element
selection button bar):

Work zone

This selection mode will machine all the parts located inside the work zone:

Whole sheet

This option machines all the interior contours of all the parts nested on the sheet:

243
Lantek Punch module

Punching with...

After selecting the parts whose interior contours are going to be machined, the system will prompt
for the type of machining

One punch

With this option, the system will use the punch specified by the user for all the internal machining:

Punch

SQ-10 60 Change

If the punch is not placed in the operative turret, the system will show a dialogue so that it can be
set.

All punches

This option will make use of all the defined punches. If one of them is not in the operative turret,
the system will show the dialogue for placing it.
Also, the user can choose the order to follow with the punches.

Ordering punches

By size

The system will use first the smallest punches and then the biggest.

Manually

The system will show a window where the punch order can be established manually.

244
Lantek Punch module

Available punches Ordered punches

Punch Station Multitool > Punch Station Multitool

<
RE-10 17 0 >> SQ-50 4 0
<< SQ-10 6 0

2.4.3.1.3 Punching outside in automatic mode

This option allows to machine automatically the external elements, To do this, the user has to
select the elements to be machined, and then the system will ask for the punches to use (and the
turret dialogue for punch placement):

Parts

This option machines the exterior contours of the parts selected by the user (see element
selection button bar):

Work zone

This selection mode will machine all the parts located inside the work zone:

Whole sheet

245
Lantek Punch module

This option machines all the exterior contours of all the parts nested on the sheet:

To edge...

- No edging

- By nibbling

- By extraction

- By pocketing

Once the parts whose exterior contours are going to be machine has been selected, the user can
choose to make edging or not. This operation is explained in automatic machining - edging by
punching section.

2.4.3.1.4 Edging by nibbling

The system will order to make a nibbling punch for all the piece of sheet which is between the
parts and the sheet edges. In the following example, the edging has been made by nibbling, and
the edges order is: left, right and upper:

246
Lantek Punch module

The system will prompt for the tool to use and will show the turret placement dialogue if needed.

2.4.3.1.5 Edging by extraction

Depending on the division length, the system will make the edging by extractions inserting stops
for evacuating the sheet pieces:

The system will prompt for the tool to use and will show the turret placement dialogue if needed.

247
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.6 Edging by pocketing

The machine will punch with pocket machining all the sheet sides:

The system will prompt for the tool to use and will show the turret placement dialogue if needed.

2.4.3.1.7 Total edging

With this option you can configure the punch edging parameters.

Possibility to make the “Total edging” of the nesting by punching. This option will make all the
edging of all the sheet by pocketing. The different between this option and the option “Edging by
pocketing”, is that the first one will also machine the gaps between parts.

248
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.8 Machining inside in manual mode

This option allows the user to machine interior elements of the nested parts. On this kind of
machining, the user should select the interior contours and the system will make the machining in
the clicked order:

The clicked interior contours can be anyone of the sheet, it is no necessary to finish the contours
of one part for making others:

This option is useful for making the machining in an exact order.

2.4.3.1.9 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch

This option allows the user to machine interior elements of the nested parts but with a selected
tool. On this kind of machining, the user should select the punch to use and the interior contours
and the system will make the machining if possible. First of all the user should select the tool to
use:

Punch Station Multitool

SQ-10 6 0
RE-20x15 17 0
SQ-30 16 0
SQ-50 4 0
SQ-60 3 0
SQ-80 5 0

249
Lantek Punch module

Then, go clicking the interior contours and the system will go making the machining with the
selected tool:

When one element is clicked, the system checks the area of the contour and the selected punch,
and it will make the machining or not depending on the values of the following parameters in the
machine configuration:
1. Punching parameters - Minimum ratio of nibbling step / thickness
2. Punching parameters - Tool diagonal / factor
3. Automatic machining - Part punched - pocket ratios
4. Automatic machining - Part punched - overlapping
5. Automatic machining - Part punched - Maximum number of punches for rectangular pocket

2.4.3.1.10 Punch outside in manual mode

With this option, the user can make the machine of the external elements manually. On this kind
of machining, the user selects the exterior contours and the system will make the machining in
the clicked order:

250
Lantek Punch module

The clicked point is important because the system will perform the external nibblings from the
nearest segment limit to the clicked point.

Before selecting the exterior contours, the system will prompt for the punches to use with
horizontal and vertical segments, and if needed, it will show the turret placement dialogue.

The whole side:

Using this option the user can punch a part in automatic when punching the exterior of a part in
manual.

Until now if any of the sides of a part had geometric microjoints, when punching the exterior
manually, the system was only punching the clicked segment up to the microjoint. Now expert will
punch the whole side keeping the microjoints.

2.4.3.1.11 Extractions of machined parts

Allows to assign evacuations to all sheet parts.

There are four methods for evacuating the parts: By lift (See page xx) , using traps (See page
xx), using micro-joints(See page xx) keeping them on the sheet or simply stopping the machine
(See page xx)for making evacuation manually.

Remove part through chute where possible

The machine will use the traps for evacuations if the part lengths allow it. This option will no
appear if the traps of the machine has not been configured on Main elements - Work Centers -
Machine - Configure - Work chutes. (See page XXXX)

TRAP

Move the sheet to the trap: The machine will move the sheet for centering the part on the trap
making easier the evacuation.

Move the part after open the trap: Sometimes, the part can't fall intro the trap completely. With
this parameter enabled, the machine will make small movements for making the part fall into the

251
Lantek Punch module

trap after it has been opened. The distance for these movements should be configured on the
parameter Increment of Work chutes configuration.(See page XXXX)

Fasten the part during the extraction: If this parameter is enabled, then the part to be extracted
will remain fastened during the entire extraction process until the trap opens.

Vacumm & Hammer: If the machine has Vacumm or hammer systems, the system will order to
the machine to use them after opening the trap for making the part evacuation effective.

% of piece inside the trap (e.g. 100,000): The trap will not be open if the part is not placed over it
the percent given here. 100% means that all the part must be over the trap before opening it.

Punch for the final exterior stroke: It is possible to define to use a different tool for the last hit of
the part exterior machining before opening the trap. In the following example, only one hit
remains for machine the complete part. With this option the user can choose to use a different
tool for it, punch, and then open the trap:

Use only when optimizing: The final exterior stroke option will be used only when the optimize
extracts using trap option is enabled.

Optimize: The machine will open the trap and will try to evaluate more than one part keeping the
trap opened.

For example, this is the situation before giving hit and opening the trap:

The machine will perform the last hit of the part of the right, then open the trap for evacuating it.
But instead of opening and closing it for each part, it will keep opened and the system will
machine the part of the middle and the part of the left evacuating all of them with the same trap.
After the last hit and evacuation (part of the left), the trap will be closed:

The result is that with one trap open/close, the machine has evaluated three parts.

Optimize extracts using trap:

Yes, with 1 retaining tab: The process will be done using one retaining tab:

Yes, with 2 retaining tab: In this case, two retaining tabs will be used.

Direction of optimization: The system will look for the parts placed on the direction configured
here when performing the trap optimization method:

252
Lantek Punch module

Automatic. (according to the tramp): The system will decide which direction is better to use
depending on the part placement and the trap lengths.

Horizontal: The parts placed in X coordinate will be tested.

Vertical: In this case, the parts placed in Y coordinate.

Horizontal & Vertical: The system will try to optimize both X and Y coordinates from the trap open
order.

Tolerance to optimize extraction (e.g. 1,000): Once the direction of optimization has been
established, the system will look for evacuating parts with the same coordinate, this value is the
difference allowed between the positions. For example, if one part is placed 2 mm below, and the
tolerance is just 1 mm, it is not going to be used for this evacuation.

Minimum length of retaining tab: This is the minimum length allowed for the retaining tab, for the
last hit before the trap is opened.

Reorder extractions for proximity: If the system detects that is better to make the extractions in
different order, if this option is enabled, it will change this order making the process faster.

Removal speed (e.g. 1,000 mm./m.):

This is the machine speed at the moment of evacuating the part. Normally the trap evacuations
should be done at slower speed for avoiding part collision problems, or, for example, when
opening the trap the part may insert below the sheet.

Dwell time:

The time the trap will remain opened after the evacuation has been done.

Extract parts where possible by lift:

If the machine has a lift system, it should be used for evacuations. If this option is selected, the
following parameters must be configured:

LIFT

Minimum number of suction cups (e.g. 1): This is the minimum number of suction cups that the lift
should use for extracting the part, if the number of cups is smaller, then it will not be evacuated by
lift.

253
Lantek Punch module

Move suction cups carriage: There are some lift machines whose suction cups can move from the
lifting carriage for getting some parts or holes better.

Minimum length and Minimum width: Using this parameters the user can limit the minimum size
(dimensions) of a part to be evacuated by LIFT.

Lift has priority: With this option the user can prioritize evacuations by LIFT on evacuations by
TRAP.

How to configure carriage movement (See page XXXX)

Apply micro-joints to parts

The system will apply automatically micro-joints as evacuation method depending on the value
given on the following parameters:

Punch for the final exterior stroke

Using this option the user will be able to select a different punch for the last punch stroke before a
LIFT evacuation (Similar to the existing option for TRAP evacuations).

When this punch is defined, the system will display the overlap value for this punch (This value
will be the same used for TRAP evacuations).

Prioritize suction cups depending on center of gravity

Using this option the user can prioritize the evacuation of a part by:

The number of suction cups used to perform the evacuation.

Select the best suction cups to get the best gravity center of the part to be evacuated.

Prioritize

With this parameter the user can prioritize the Lift point selection in the horizontal or vertical
exteriors. This parameter “Prioritize”, allows to choose between three options:

No: The selection of the evacuation point depends on the maximum number of suction cups that
this point allows using and on the best gravity center obtained from the utilized suction cups.

Horizontal: If there is any point in a horizontal exterior lateral where it is possible to place a lift
point, it will be selected before any point of a exterior vertical. Among the possible horizontal
points, the system selects the one which uses the most number of suction cups or the best

254
Lantek Punch module

gravity center (depending on “The number of active suction cups has higher priority than the
gravity center” parameter).

Vertical: Opposite case.

Tolerance to distance between centers of gravity:

With this option the user can define the minimum distance from the gravity center of the part to
the gravity center of the suction cups so that the evacuation point is considered as valid.

MICROJOINTS

The width of microjoints is thickness Dependent: If this parameter, is enabled, there are two
values to configure:
1. Factor of thickness for corner microjoints (e.g. 1,000)
2. Factor of thickness for middle microjoints (e.g. 1,000)
The system will calculate the width of the microjoints multiplying the value given here and the
thickness of the sheet.

But if the width of micro-joint is not thickness dependant (disabled), then the fix value will be
taken from the parameter Width value of micro-joint (e.g. 1,000)

If this parameter, the width of microjoints is thickness Dependent is disabled, there are two
values to configure:

1. Width Value of middle micro-joints.

2. Width value of corner micro-joints.

Maximum length without microjoints (e.g. 100,000): This is the maximum distance allowed to part
contours without micro-joints.

Use a machine stop to remove parts

In this case, the machine will be stopped after every part machining waiting for manual
evacuation.

Use micro-joint punches:

If this parameter is enabled, the user can configure the values for Micro-joints punch by selecting
three point button (). For automatic machining for external contours when microjoints are needed.

255
Lantek Punch module

Micro-joints punch and Auxiliary punch: It is Possible to configure which punches will be used to
make the microjoints when making evacuations with microjoints. If any of these punches has
been defined, and/or the parameter to active this option is off, the system will use the same
punch as the one used for the external contour.

STOP

Zone:

Depending on the punching machine type (how the clamps, the head... are placed) it will be
better to perform the last hit in a specific zone making easier the manual evacuation. If the
selected option is the '?', the meaning is that the system will not try to make the last hit in a
specific zone.

Lengthen exterior nibble cycle

With this option the user can do automatic evacuations to lengthen exterior nibble cycles. This
parameter will be only available in STOP, LIFT, or TRAP evacuations. only in Automatic
machining.

2.4.3.1.12 Finish off the corners

This option allows to finish the corners of the selected parts. Is specially designed for these parts
whose corners can be machined together with other part's corners. For example, with the
following part whose corner is rounded with a 5 mm fillet:

When doing the nesting, the machining result is:

256
Lantek Punch module

But using a cross punch with 5 mm radiuses:

And with this option, the system will perform one punch for the corners, resulting in the machining
of four corners with just one hit:

The user must select first the parts he wants to finish (see element selection buttons bar) and
then select the punch to be used. If the punch is not in the operative turret, the system will show
the user a dialogue, so that it can be set. Finally, the user can enter the punch angle using a
dialogue.

2.4.3.1.13 Punch remnants line

257
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.14 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode

The system will include machining orders for destroying the sheet framework depending on the
parameters given here:

Framework lengths

The L and H determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated as scrap.

Minimum and maximum steps between strokes in X and Y

For destroying the sheet framework, the system will introduce punch hits. These four values
delimits the distances between these strokes.

Minimum step between punch stroke in X(P):- (e.g. 15,000)

Minimum step between punch stroke in Y(P):- (e.g. 15,000)

Maximum step between punch stroke in X(P):-(e.g. 25,000)

Maximum step between punch stroke in Y(P):- (e.g. 25,000)

Make it with an existing tool if.../ Maximum diameter of the tool (e.g. 10,000)

The system will look for a tool already placed in the turret for performing this operation, but the
lengths of the tool must comply the value given here.

Direction

Depending on the selection, i.e Horizontal or vertical the system will include sheet framework
destroying hits in the clicked points.

For example, with the following sheet:

258
Lantek Punch module

The machining result from the selected point is:

Vertical Horizontal
Punch angle

With this option it is possible for the user to use any punch to "Punch the sheet framework". Using
this the user will be able to configure the "Punch angle".

2.4.3.1.15 Punch the whole work zone

The system will make the machining of all the interiors and exteriors contours of the current work
zone, but it will not make any reposition movement:

259
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.16 Punch vertical outside in manual mode

This option allows the user to machine vertical external elements selecting them manually. Before
selecting the vertical external elements that are going to be machined the vertical external punch
must be selected:

The system will start the exterior machining from the nearest segment limit to the clicked point.

If the parameter "Explode punching around clamps" or "Explode punches outside the zone"
(Work center / Utilities / Configuration / Machine / Automatic machining / Nested punch

260
Lantek Punch module

configuration / Outside punching) is active the system will allow to punch the punches which are
in the linear nibbling side which is inside the working or out of the clamp zone.

2.4.3.1.17 Punch horizontal outside in manual mode

This option allows the user to machine horizontal external elements selecting them manually.
Before selecting the horizontal external elements that are going to be machined, the horizontal
external punch must be selected:

The system will start the exterior machining from the nearest segment limit to the clicked point.

If the parameter "Explode punching around clamps" or "Explode punches outside the zone"
(Work center / Utilities / Configuration / Machine / Automatic machining / Nested punch
configuration / Outside punching) is active the system will allow to punch the punches which are
in the linear nibbling side which is inside the working or out of the clamp zone.

261
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.1.18 Machining scrap line

Machines the line of the edge of remnants (if it have been created). The system will prompt for
the tool, and, if needed, will show the turret placement dialogue:

2.4.3.2 Punching with shear

2.4.3.2.1 Machining inside in automatic mode

2.4.3.2.2 Shearing outside in automatic mode

2.4.3.2.3 Edging with the shear

2.4.3.2.4 Finishing the side

2.4.3.2.5 Shearing to the band

2.4.3.2.6 Shearing to the bottom part

2.4.3.2.7 Shearing the lower band

2.4.3.2.8 Extraction of the lower band

2.4.3.2.9 Machining inside in manual mode

2.4.3.2.10 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch

2.4.3.2.11 Finish off the corners

2.4.3.2.12 Machining scrap line

262
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.2.13 Shearing in manual mode

2.4.3.2.14 Shear one part

2.4.3.2.15 Punch shear references

2.4.3.2.16 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode

2.4.3.2.17 Punch the whole work zone

2.4.3.2.1 Machining inside in automatic mode

This option allows to machine automatically the interior elements of the nested parts. For making
this, the user should select first which parts to machine:

Parts

This option machines the interior contours of the parts selected by the user (see element
selection button bar):

Work zone

This selection mode will machine all the parts located inside the work zone:

263
Lantek Punch module

Whole sheet

This option machines all the interior contours of all the parts nested on the sheet:

Punching with...

After selecting the parts whose interior contours are going to be machined, the system will prompt
for the type of machining

One punch

With this option, the system will use the punch specified by the user for all the internal machining:

Punch

SQ-10 60 Change

If the punch is not placed in the operative turret, the system will show a dialogue so that it can be
set.

All punches

264
Lantek Punch module

This option will make use of all the defined punches. If one of them is not in the operative turret,
the system will show the dialogue for placing it.
Also, the user can choose the order to follow with the punches.

Ordering punches

By size

The system will use first the smallest punches and then the biggest.

Manually

The system will show a window where the punch order can be established manually.

Available punches Ordered punches

Punch Station Multitool > Punch Station Multitool

<
RE-10 17 0 >> SQ-50 4 0
<< SQ-10 6 0

2.4.3.2.2 Shearing outside in automatic mode

This option allows the user to machine external elements of the automatically nested parts. This
type of machining is carried out using the following dialogue:

Parts

This option machines the parts selected by the user (see element selection buttons bar)..

Work zone

This option machines all the parts located inside the operation area.

The whole sheet

This option machines all the parts of the sheet.

265
Lantek Punch module

2.4.3.2.3 Edging with the shear

The Edging operation consists on polish the upper and left margins of the sheet until arriving to
part shearing geometries using shear hits. In the following example, the zones until the red line
have been edged:

The system will apply the configuration made in Automatic Machining - Shearing section.

2.4.3.2.4 Finishing the side

For "side of the sheet" the system refers to the right part of the sheet which remains after the
machining has been finished. When this part of sheet is narrow it can cause stuck problems, so it
is better to eliminate it:

266
Lantek Punch module

The elimination of this piece of sheet can be done at the end of the part shearing, or at the same
time as the part are sheared. In this last case, after shearing one of the part of the right, a new hit
is added in the right border of the sheet in the same place as the shearing of the part for erasing
one piece of the sheet side:

The way this operation will be done depends on the configuration made in Automatic Machining -
Shearing section.

2.4.3.2.5 Shearing to the band

The "band" is defined for the system as the piece of sheet which remains below the sheared
parts:

267
Lantek Punch module

Depending on the machine type and the kind of work to be done, this band may comply different
conditions:

The width should be exactly the same as the defined lower margin of the sheet (for reusing this
remnant)

The width should be always lower than a determined value (for being allowed to evacuate it). In
this case, the band may have a minimum width because of the limitations of the shear for working
lower than a defined Y coordinate.

The way of performing this operation depends on the settings made in Automatic machining -
Shearing section of the machine configuration.

2.4.3.2.6 Shearing to the bottom part

The "band" is defined for the system as the piece of sheet which remains below the sheared
parts:

Depending on the machine type and the kind of work to be done, this band may comply different
conditions:

The width should be exactly the same as the defined lower margin of the sheet (for reusing this
remnant)

268
Lantek Punch module

The width should be always lower than a determined value (for being allowed to evacuate it). In
this case, the band may have a minimum width because of the limitations of the shear for working
lower than a defined Y coordinate.

The way of performing this operation depends on the settings made in Automatic machining -
Shearing section of the machine configuration.

2.4.3.2.7 Shearing the lower band

Enabled, the machine will shear the lower band of the sheet. Normally this band is only sheared
when the sheet length is big and the resulting band can't be evacuated.

This operation will be done or not depending on the Automatic machining - Shearing settings.

2.4.3.2.8 Evacuating of the lower band

Using this option will make the system to introduce a instruction for evacuating the lower remnant
(band) of the sheet after all the machining has been done.

See the section related to this operation: Automatic machining - Shearing

2.4.3.2.9 Machining inside in manual mode

This option allows the user to machine interior elements of the nested parts. On this kind of
machining, the user should select the interior contours and the system will make the machining in
the clicked order:

269
Lantek Punch module

The clicked interior contours can be anyone of the sheet, it is no necessary to finish the contours
of one part for making others:

This option is useful for making the machining in an exact order.

2.4.3.2.10 Machining inside in manual mode with one punch

This option allows the user to machine interior elements of the nested parts but with a selected
tool. On this kind of machining, the user should select the punch to use and the interior contours
and the system will make the machining if possible. First of all the user should select the tool to
use:
Punch Station Multitool
SQ-10 6 0
RE-20x15 17 0
SQ-30 16 0
SQ-50 4 0
SQ-60 3 0
SQ-80 5 0

Then, go clicking the interior contours and the system will go making the machining with the
selected tool:

When one element is clicked, the system checks the area of the contour and the selected punch,
and it will make the machining or not depending on the values of the following parameters in the
machine configuration:
1. Punching parameters - Minimum ratio of nibbling step / thickness
2. Punching parameters - Tool diagonal / factor

270
Lantek Punch module

3. Automatic machining - Part punched - pocket ratios

4. Automatic machining - Part punched - overlapping
5. Automatic machining - Part punched - Maximum number of punches for rectangular pocket

2.4.3.2.11 Finish off the corners

This option allows to finish the corners of the selected parts. Is specially designed for these parts
whose corners can be machined together with other part's corners. For example, with the
following part whose corner is rounded with a 5 mm fillet:

When doing the nesting, the machining result is:

But using a cross punch with 5 mm radiuses:

And with this option, the system will perform one punch for the corners, resulting in the machining
of four corners with just one hit:

271
Lantek Punch module

The user must select first the parts he wants to finish (see element selection buttons bar) and
then select the punch to be used. If the punch is not in the operative turret, the system will show
the user a dialogue, so that it can be set. Finally, the user can enter the punch angle using a
dialogue.

2.4.3.2.12 Machining scrap line

Machines the line of the edge of remnants (if it have been created). The system will prompt for
the tool, and, if needed, will show the turret placement dialogue:

2.4.3.2.13 Shearing in manual mode

This has three parameters

-Shearing of parts group

-Shear the remnant line (not reusable remnant)

272
Lantek Punch module

-Shear without remnant line (reusable remnant)

These option send a variable to the postprocessor with the chosen option.

2.4.3.2.14 Shear one part

With this option, the system will introduce shear machining in the clicked parts:

2.4.3.2.15 Punch shear references

2.4.3.2.16 Punch the sheet framework in manual mode

The system will include machining orders for destroying the sheet framework depending on the
parameters given here:

Framework lengths

The L and H determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated as scrap.

Minimum and maximum steps between strokes in X and Y

For destroying the sheet framework, the system will introduce punch hits. These four values
delimits the distances between these strokes.

273
Lantek Punch module

Minimum step between punch stroke in X(P):- (e.g. 15,000)

Minimum step between punch stroke in Y(P):- (e.g. 15,000)

Maximum step between punch stroke in X(P):-(e.g. 25,000)

Maximum step between punch stroke in Y(P):- (e.g. 25,000)

Make it with an existing tool if.../ Maximum diameter of the tool (e.g. 10,000)

The system will look for a tool already placed in the turret for performing this operation, but the
lengths of the tool must comply the value given here.

Direction

Depending on the selection, i.e Horizontal or vertical the system will include sheet framework
destroying hits in the clicked points.

For example, with the following sheet:

The machining result from the selected point is:

Vertical Horizontal

274
Lantek Punch module

Punch angle

With this option it is possible for the user to use any punch to "Punch the sheet framework". Using
this the user will be able to configure the "Punch angle".

2.4.3.2.17 Punch the whole work zone

The system will make the machining of all the interiors and exteriors contours of the current work
zone, but it will not make any reposition movement:

2.4.4 Simple cycle

After the tool has been selected, the user can choose between four different types of using it for a
simple cycle operation:

This option allows to punch at any point or, if the tool is rounded, in the center of a circle:

This option will adjust always the hit to the nearest contour to the clicked point:

275
Lantek Punch module

This option will perform a centered punching. The user will have to select the element
and then define which side of the element is going to be punched. The system will center the hit
in the segment:

This type of cycle will make the system to perform the hit to the nearest side of the
segment to the clicked point.

The user must select the segment but knowing that the hit will be done from the nearest side of
this point:

This will insert a punch tangent to two elements.

The user must select both segments in which the punching will be tangent. This option can only
be performed with round punches:

276
Lantek Punch module

NOTE: For not-rounded punches, the user can rotate the selected tool in any direction (see
rotation buttons bar). Then, when asking for tool placement in the turret, is important to place it in
a station which allows to work in the selected angle:

Adjusted to two elements: This option allows the user to make a punch stroke tangent to
two segments which are not joined. The system will internally enlarge both segments to get a
correct internal geometry (the real geometry will not be modified).

The system allows to use only Round punches.

2.4.5 Automatic machining in nesting mode

With this option the system will machine the nested parts automatically depending on the options
configured in the automatic machining section of the cutting (See page XXXX) / punching (See
page XXXX) machine configuration.

277
Lantek Punch module

The system provides different options for modifying the machining (See page XXXX) .

2.4.6 Modify

2.4.6.1 Micro-joints

2.4.6.2 Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour

2.4.6.3 Delete micro-joints

2.4.6.4 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

2.4.6.5 Order machining

2.4.6.6 Move special texts

2.4.6.7 Modify punch cycles

2.4.6.8 Modify nibble cycles

2.4.6.9 Modify pockets

2.4.6.10 Explode all

2.4.6.11 Explode by selection

2.4.6.12 Regenerate

2.4.6.13 Replace one punch with other

2.4.6.14 Modify machine initialization

2.4.6.15 Do not pass over the clamps

2.4.6.16 Labels treatment

2.4.6.17 Subprograms treatment

2.4.6.18 Delete machining of a selected punch

2.4.6.19 Allow tools to be moved if required

2.4.6.20 Modify chute operation

278
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.21 Delete chute operation

2.4.6.22 Modify lead in/outs

2.4.6.23 Modify the head management

2.4.6.24 Delete every head up/down instructions

2.4.6.25 Modify the head management of rapids

2.4.6.26 Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble moves

2.4.6.27 Apply alternate strokes on all the exterior cycles and nibble moves

2.4.6.28 Modify movements

2.4.6.29 Modify compensation

2.4.6.30 Modify the compensation of a contour

2.4.6.31 Quality dependent compensations

2.4.6.32 Avoid hits with form tools

2.4.6.33 Delete machining of selected parts

2.4.6.34 Modify the reposition point

2.4.6.35 Modify the zero point of the sheet

2.4.6.36 Retract clearance in punches

2.4.6.1 Modify Microjoints

Using this modify option, microjoints can be inserted into the parts although the machining
process has been done:

Width value of micro-joint (e.g. 10,000)

This is the distance left for the micro-joint.

279
Lantek Punch module

Position

The micro-joint will be inserted on the parts in the place selected here:

Middle:In the center of the clicked contour:

End: Will be placed in the nearest segment end of the clicked point:

Picked point:The micro-joint will be inserted in the picked point (if possible):

Limit of the work zone:The system allows to make this change just in the selected part, in the
identical parts placed with the same angle or in all the identical parts. In the following schema, the
parts which will change if clicking in the previous one depending on the selected option are
pointed with an arrow:

280
Lantek Punch module

Use micro-joints punches:

It is Possible to use the microjoint punch in “Microjoints” option inside “Modify Machining” option.
This will allow the user to add microjoints after performing the sheet machining. If the microjoint
punch is not load in the active turret, it will be automatically loaded with 0º and 90º angles and the
turret layout will be shown so that the user could place the punch in the desired station.

Also if this parameter, is enabled the user can configure the following values, they are:

Micro-joints punch: The user have to select the micro-joints punch by three point button ( ).

Auxiliary punch: The user have to select the auxiliary punch by three point button ( ).

Overlapping: In this the user can specify the distance between the micro-joints punches and
auxiliary punches.

2.4.6.2 Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour

With this parameter the user can place the "Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour”.
Available as well for combination machines.

The system allows the user to automatically assign a microjoint attribute to the contours with cut
technology depending on the size of these contours (small, medium or large). In order to define
the different sizes, the user must specify the maximum dimensions of a small contour and the
minimum dimensions of a large contour.

The microjoint values will be taken from the values specified in the automatic microjoints
depending on material and thickness or taking a fixed value.

Using this it will be possible to execute this option by modifying the machining.

281
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.3 Delete microjoints

This option allows to delete the selected micro-joints without deleting the rest of the machining of
the part:

2.4.6.4 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

With this option, one nibble cycle can be made longer the given value in mm:

Value = 1,000

The system allows to make this change just in the selected part, in the identical parts placed with
the same angle or in all the identical parts. In the following schema, the parts which will change if
clicking in the previous one depending on the selected option are pointed with an arrow:

282
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.5 Order machining in nesting

This option enables the ordering of performed machining jobs:

2.4.6.5.1 Put tools in order manually

2.4.6.5.2 Order by distances only

2.4.6.5.3 Order by distances and angles

2.4.6.5.4 Order punch sequence

2.4.6.5.5 Order cutting sequence

2.4.6.5.6 Order punch sequence semi-automatically

2.4.6.5.7 Order cut sequence

2.4.6.5.8 Order punch sequence by window

2.4.6.5.1 Put tools in order manually

The machining process can be changed for using the tools in the desired order. For making it, the
system will show all the needed tools in one list in the left. The user can select which tools are
going to be used the first moving from that list to the list of the right using the arrows.

Used tools Ordered tools

RD-10 > SQ-12

RD-25x4 < SQ-16
*RD-40x5 >> SQ-20
<<

Keep the relative of exterior punches in the sequence

With this option the user can order the machining sequence by punches manually. When the
punch order wants to be manual, this new option will allow to keep the external relative. For
instance, if I have parts in holes and the punch to machine the global external contour is ordered
in the sequence before than the external punch of the part inside holes, with this parameter ON,
the system will kept the order programmed before the new manual ordering.

283
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.5.2 Order machining by distances only

Choose this option to order machining by path only, to optimize without taking into account that
paths could be optimized by punch angle changes.

2.4.6.5.3 Order by distances and angles

Choose this option to order machining by path and angle, to change the punch angle if necessary
to optimize the path.

2.4.6.5.4 Order punch sequence

Choose this option to order machining by path only, to optimize without taking into account that
paths could be optimized by punch angle changes.

Only order the sequence of the selected tool

The order will take effect only for the selected tool

Only show the machining of the selected tool

If this option is enabled, then the system will show just the machining operation of the selected
tool.

Show the direction of movements

Enabled, the system will show the direction of the movements with an arrow in the trajectory.

Reverse cycles automatically

This parameter will go ordering the structures in automatic mode.

Explode punch macros

With this option the user can select three different parameters they are: No, Yes and Ask.

With these option if the user select "Ask" option, each time a machining macro is selected, the
system will ask if it must be exploded to be order the punch sequence of this macro in a different
way

284
Lantek Punch module

Order mode

The user will go clicking the elements, and the system will go ordering them depending on the
option selected here:

Before: The first clicked elements will be the last machined ones.

After: In this case, the first clicked elements will be the first machined ones.

Make on

The configuration made on this window can be applied to:

-The selected part

-Identical parts with the same angle

-All identical parts

2.4.6.5.5 Order cutting sequence

Once the machining has been done, with this option the user can modify the orders in which the
parts will be machined.

Show the direction of movements

Enabled will make the system to show during the order process the movement direction.

Order mode

Before: The order will be established from the end to the beginning, being the first clicked part,
the last which is going to be machined.

After: In this case, the order will be established from the beginning to end being the first clicked
part the beginning of the machining.

By parts:

This option allows to order the machining of the contours of the parts. For example, with a part
with different holes, the user can choose which holes are going to be machined at the beginning
with this option, and the change will be made for all the equal parts.

285
Lantek Punch module

Make on

The configuration made on this window can be applied to:

-The selected part

-Identical parts with the same angle

-All identical parts

2.4.6.5.6 Order punch sequence semi-automatically

Choose this option to order machining by path only, to optimize without taking into account that
paths could be optimized by punch angle changes.

Punch (e.g. RD-10)

The configuration made below will be applied to the machining executed by this tool.

Start and direction

This specifies from which corner and the direction that the tool will follow.

Apply punching in zigzag direction

Enabled will make the system to apply zigzag movements in the machining of the tool.

Number of zones (e.g. 10)

Those are fictitious zones in which the sheet is going to be divided for following the machining
order in horizontal or vertical.

Order

The order can be by parts or by direction:

286
Lantek Punch module

By parts: If the selected order is by parts, then the system needs to know the place of the contour
where the tool is going to finish the part machining.

By direction: The order will be made by direction instead of by parts.

Show only the machining of the selected tool

When ordering, the system will show just the machining of the current tool.

Show the direction of movements

The user will see the direction of the rapid movements if this checkbox is enabled.

Make on

The configuration made on this window can be applied to:

One punch: Just the selected punch.

Select punches: In this case, the use can select which punches will be ordered.

All punches: The changes will be made for all the tools.

2.4.6.5.7 Order cut sequence

Once the machining has been done, with this option the user can modify the orders in which the
parts will be machined.

Show the direction of movements

Enabled will make the system to show during the order process the movement direction.

Order mode

Before: The order will be established from the end to the beginning, being the first clicked part,
the last which is going to be machined.

287
Lantek Punch module

After: In this case, the order will be established from the beginning to end being the first clicked
part the beginning of the machining.

By parts:

This option allows to order the machining of the contours of the parts. For example, with a part
with different holes, the user can choose which holes are going to be machined at the beginning
with this option, and the change will be made for all the equal parts.

Make on

The configuration made on this window can be applied to:

-The selected part

-Identical parts with the same angle

-All identical parts

2.4.6.5.8 Order punch sequence by window

Choose this option for the automatic machining to optimize the punching sequence.

With this option, the user will be able to decides if he wants to:

Work with a group of used punches: After selecting the punches, the system will ask for the areas
of the sheet (window selection) to define the machining sequence. After that the user will be able
to select between any of the following ordering modes :

288
Lantek Punch module

These two operations (1.- Area selection and 2.- Select the ordering mode) can be done as many
times as desired with the same group of punches selected at the beginning of the option.

Work with all the used punched keeping their sequence of utilization: This options Works in the
same way as the option A) but each time the system will only active ONE punch. Expert will

display a auxiliary toolbar to select the desired punch from the punches list. The active
punch will be displayed at the status bar (bottom right side of the screen)

2.4.6.6 Move special texts

It allows the user to move the written texts of the different parts of nesting:

With this option the user can move automatically special texts (Inkjet texts) in nesting module.
This option shows a window asking for automatic mode or not. If you don't select automatic then
the system will do in manual mode, like always. if you select automatic the system will do
automatically but depending on the others parameters of the window. If the parameter " Search
step" is very

2.4.6.7 Modify punch cycles

There are different options for changing the punch cycles:

2.4.6.7.1 Reverse structures

2.4.6.7.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns

2.4.6.7.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns

289
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.7.4 Change the initial point of grid structures

2.4.6.7.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures

2.4.6.7.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures

2.4.6.7.7 Delete stroke on patterns

2.4.6.7.1 Reverse structures

The execution of this option over an existing structure will change between the end and starting
points of the structure resulting in a direction reverse.

2.4.6.7.2 Decrease the stroke of linear or circular patterns

When a structure is selected, the system will delete one hit:

2.4.6.7.3 Apply alternate strokes on linear or circular patterns

When doing the pattern, the machine will perform first the pair hits and then the odd ones. For
example, if applied in the following structure:

290
Lantek Punch module

The machining sequence will be:

This option is good for the tools because in this way they will always give the hits centered.

2.4.6.7.4 Change the initial point of grid structures

It changes the initial point of the structure for the first hit of any of the selected corner:

2.4.6.7.5 Change the principal direction of grid structures

The main direction of execution of the grid structure will be changed from horizontal to vertical
and the opposite:

291
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.7.6 Change the zigzag direction of grid structures

When selecting the structure, the machining sequence will change into zigzag ones:

2.4.6.7.7 Delete stroke on patterns

With this option it will be possible for the user to delete strikes from structures through different
kinds of selection: Points, Window, Inside of a contour, Outside of a contour and Out of the part.

After the strokes deletion, the structures will be reconstructed and if necessary divided.

2.4.6.8 Modify nibble cycles

There are different options for changing the nibble cycles:

2.4.6.8.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value

2.4.6.8.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

2.4.6.8.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point

2.4.6.8.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point

2.4.6.8.5 Reverse nibble cycle

2.4.6.8.6 Break nibble cycle

2.4.6.8.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance

2.4.6.8.8 Join nibble cycles

2.4.6.8.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

292
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble

2.4.6.8.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble

2.4.6.8.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots

2.4.6.8.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble

2.4.6.8.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles

2.4.6.8.1 Shorten nibbling cycle by a value

This option reduces the selected nibbling in the value inserted by the user. The user must select
a nibble cycle and the system will request a value to reduce it. The reduction will take place in the
selected side:

2.4.6.8.2 Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value

With this option, one nibble cycle can be made longer the given value in mm:

Value = 1,000

The difference between this option and the Modify - Lengthen nibbling cycle by a value is that in
this case the change will be made only in the clicked part don't allowing to apply to more than one
part at the same time.

293
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.3 Shorten nibble cycle to a specified point

This option allows to change the nibbling making it shorter. For making it, the user should select
the nibbling side to short and the new point where that side will arrive:

2.4.6.8.4 Lengthen nibble cycle to a specified point

This option allows to change the nibbling making it longer. For making it, the user should select
the nibbling side to short and the new point where that side will arrive:

In this case, the difference can be seen using the sheet simulation option (F12):

294
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.5 Reverse nibble cycle

This option inverts the direction of the nibbling changing the initial and final points of the selected
nibble cycle:

2.4.6.8.6 Break nibble cycle

This option inserts a microcut in the selected nibble cycle. The system will divide the nibbling into
two with the distance given by the user.

The microcut will be performed on the same point where the nibbling was selected:

2.4.6.8.7 Break nibble cycle at a distance

This option allows breaking a nibbling cycle at a specific point. The system inserts a microjoint
inside a nibbling cycle doing so by entering the distance with respect to any of the start/end points
of the nibbling cycle. If the selected point when clicking on the nibbling is closer to the nibblings
start point, then, the system will take into account the distance from the start point. If the selected
point is closer to the nibblings end point, then, the system will take this end point into account. It

295
Lantek Punch module

is possible to measure the distance to the micro-joint's middle point or start point. If the distance
is shorter than the length of the tool used for the nibbling cycle, then, the system will take into
account the length of the mentioned tool.

This option is available for punching and combination machines and it is included in the ‘Drawing’
module as web as in the ‘Nesting and machining’ module.

2.4.6.8.8 Join nibble cycles

When two nibblings have the same direction but they are separated, they can be joined into one
nibble cycle. The user must select the nibbling and the system will look for the nearest nibble
cycle to join:

2.4.6.8.9 Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

With this option the exterior nibble cycles can be lengthen for all the parts at once. The user can
select to perform it in the horizontal or vertical contours, or both giving values to the X and Y
parameters:

For example, with this nesting:

296
Lantek Punch module

All the exterior nibble cycles will be lengthen:

There is also one checkbox Only corners which if enable will apply the lengthen only to those
parts whose corners have not any special treatment, only one nibbling for horizontal and one for
vertical. In this case, the parts which fillets or chamfers will not be modified.

In the example, the part of the right have not a standard corner and it will not be changed if the
Only corners checkbox is enabled:

297
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.10 Increase stroke for linear nibble

Using this option, the nibble cycle's overlapping will be increased making the total number of hits
of the nibbling higher.

For example, the following nibble cycle will be done with 7 hits:

Applying this option, the overlapping between hits will be more and the hits now are 8:

2.4.6.8.11 Decrease stroke for linear nibble

When a linear nibble is selected, the system will delete one hit:

2.4.6.8.12 Apply alternate strokes on linear slots

When doing a nibbling, normally all the hits are done in the direction sequence. Using this option,
the hits of the selected nibbling will be done alternating trying always not to perform two near hits.

For example, the following nibbling will be made from the left to the right with sequence hits:

When this option is applied, the order changes making first the alternate four hits, and completing
the rest with alternate hits too:

298
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.8.13 Minimal overlapping for linear nibble

The value given here will be the minimum overlapping value which must comply the existing
linear nibbles. The following example means that every linear nibble must overlap at least the 8%
of the tool length:

Minimal overlapping for lineal nibble in automatic mode (enabled)

% minimal overlapping for internal nibble 8,000

% minimal overlapping for external nibble 8,000

When using the automatic options, the user can configure a minimal overlapping in the automatic
machining - Nested punch configuration - Outside punching

2.4.6.8.14 Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles

This option allows changing the punches at both sides of a slot. This option is valid to apply a
microjoint punch on a predefined lineal nibble.

The default values for the punch to be used at both sides and the overlap for this punch will be
the same as the ones defined for the automatic microjoints at part level.

Double punch

This option allows 2 stroke distance a predefined value (by default the width of the side
microjoint) in the option " Change the punch of an end on linear nibble cycles".

299
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.9 Modify pockets

Shorten pocket a value

This option reduces a hollowing in a particular value on the side selected by the user. The user
must select the hollowing to be reduced and then the system will request a value to reduce the
hollowing The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

Lengthen pocket a value

This option increases a hollowing by a particular value on the side selected by the user. The user
must select the hollowing to be reduced and then the system will request a value to increase the
hollowing. The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

Modify pocket to a point

This option alters a hollowing to a particular point inserted by the user. The user must select the
hollowing to be altered and then insert the point to which alteration must reach (increase or
reduce) The hollowing will be reduced on the selected side:

300
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.10 Explode all

The system will decompose all the structures of the sheet which are enabled in this window into
simple punching operations.

Rectangular
pockets

Circular
pockets

Linear nibble - > Simple punching

cycles operations
irregular
patterns

Linear patterns

Circular
patterns

Grid patterns

2.4.6.11 Explode by selection

This option allows the user to exploit any machined structures . Here, exploit means that any
punching structure (except for nibbling) will be performed as individual punches).

301
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.12 Regenerate

This option allows to regenerate any sequence of individual punches in some kind of structure in
order to optimize the punching program. The system will look for the enabled structures of the left
and will convert them into the structures of the right of the "=>" arrow:

Single punchings => Linear structures

Restores single punchings in linear structures.

Linear structures => Linear nibblings

Restores linear structures in nibblings if the punchings of the structure are lapped.

Linear structures => Grid structures

Restores linear structures in grid patterns if the punchings of the structure are not lapped.

Structures of two points => Simple punchings processes

Exploits structures of two points as they are more easily created as simple punchings processes.

NOTE: No type of sequence in nibbling can be regenerated.

2.4.6.13 Replace one punch with other

This option is very useful in the situation where the whole machining of the sheet has been done,
but one used tool is broken. Using this option, the system will show a list with all the used tools in
the current sheet, and allows to select one for changing with other one.

For example, if working with a RD-5mm tool which is broken, the user can change this tool for a
RD-4.75 one which will make all the machining of the RD-5 ones.

302
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.14 Modify data of machine initialization (Punching)

This option allows the user to modify some initialization parameters of the machine (for a more
complete configuration see Configure machines) using the following dialogue:

2.4.6.14.1 Startup

2.4.6.14.2 Place the clamps with the keyboard

2.4.6.14.3 Place the clamps with the mouse

2.4.6.14.4 From point

2.4.6.14.5 Move the from point interactively

2.4.6.14.6 Sheet parameters

2.4.6.14.7 Upload/Download sheets

2.4.6.14.8 Punching parameters

2.4.6.14.9 General machine options

2.4.6.14.10 Tool properties

2.4.11.7.11 Postprocessor Data

2.4.6.14.1 Startup

This option enables the configuration of parameters of the Initialization section of a machine. For
this:

Prompt for this data when initializing

The machine initialization process must be done always before making any machine instruction.
With this option enabled, the system will show the Startup dialog always when the initialization
instruction is executed.

303
Lantek Punch module

Initializing the machine: In the nesting module it can be done manually using the option

Machining->Initialize .

Execute every rapid with head up

Before any rapid movement there will be one instruction for the machine to rise the cutting head if
this parameter is enabled. This is used for safety, to prevent head damages.

Apply head up at the beginning of machining

This option will appear only if Execute every rapid with head up is disabled. With this, the user
configures the system for including one head up instruction always at the beginning of the
machining process.

The machine has Laser-eye

The Laser eye is one device of some laser machines which is used to detect and avoid possible
collisions with the head. If enabled, the system will use it.

Clicking on ( ) button will show the dialog where the method for using the laser eye can be
chosen:

304
Lantek Punch module

CNC name = PartNo

The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo. which is the internal name of the
CNC files. The PartNo. can be assigned in different ways through the following parameters:

Default: The Part No. will be assigned by default using the value introduced in the box PartNo
(e.g. 00000011).

Automatic: The Part No. will take an automatic value that will increase for subsequent CNCs. Six
additional parameters will be displayed:

Reset CNC counter: This option will reset the CNC's counter

Minimum: PartNo: Minimum number of character for the PartNo.

Maximum: PartNo: Maximum number of character for the PartNo.

Step of the PartNo: The number of steps used for the PartNo.

Number of characters (e.g. 8): Number of characters for the PartNo.

Previous text (e.g. P): The first characters of the PartNo.

Pre-initialization:

The user can create the remnant line during the machining initialization. These are the following
parameters:

Explode modules: With this option the user can do machining pre-initialization. And allows to
explode all the modules before (and only before) the machining initialization.

Delete the machining totally outside of the sheet: This option will delete the machining done
outside of the sheet. It will be configurable if the parameter "Prompt for the data when initializing"
from 'Startup menu" is active, or when the user initializes the sheet.

Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: By this option the remnant line will be
created automatically and with the shape configured by the user.

The following two parameters allow deleting the remnant and remnant line.

Delete existing remnants: By using this option the user can delete the existing remnants which
are created by the cutting line of the remnant automatically. If any remnant exists and there is no

305
Lantek Punch module

configuration to delete them, will not be possible to delete the remnant line nor generate a new
one.

Delete existing remnants line: The user can use this option for the deletion of existing remnants
line. If any remnant line exists and there is no configuration to delete it, will not be possible to
create a new one.

Note: These data could be configured during initialization if in the configuration of "Startup" the
parameter "Prompt for this data when initializing" is active.

Generate geometric micro-joints in parts: When adding the microjoints during the pre-initialization,
there are necessary two parameters to define the "Minimum length of the exterior punches
(horizontal exterior and vertical exterior )", because the system needs to know at this moment
which punches are going to be used for the exterior machining to calculate the minimum distance
between microjoints. If the user configures these parameters to ‘-1.0’, the system will search the
Minimum length of the exterior punches.

Speed Rates

The machine speeds can be configured in Speed Rates dialog box.

Feed rates
Cut speed 4000,000
mm./m.
Chamfered 4000,000
speed mm./m.
Powder mark 4000,000
speed mm./m.
Drill mark speed 4000,000
mm./m.
Pen mark speed 4000,000
mm./m.
Cut mark speed 4000,000
mm./m.
Rapid speed 4000,000
mm./m.

Note: The parameter Wheel tool speed will be activated if the configuration is for punching.

306
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.14.2 Place the clamps with the keyboard

This option allows the user to modify the amount of clamps, as well as the distance between
them. For a more complete configuration, see Configure machines - Clamps.

Number of clamps (e.g. 4)

The System will take into account the number of clamps of the machine. The position of each one
can be set up depending on the Positioning parameter:

Position Distance
Position
Clamp 1 4-
365
Clamp 2 8-
885

Indicates the distance between different clamp positions.

If the clamp type is fixed, once these three fields have been specified, the Positions boxes will
become combo boxes displaying only the different possibilities for clamp placement.

If the clamp type is any, these fields (First position, Number of positions and Distance between
positions) will not appear and the Positions combo boxes will be able to contain any value (since
all values will be valid).

Automatic

It automatically calculates the distance between the clamps.

Offset of clamps zone

Clicking on this button will make the system to show a dialogue where the user can add an
additional offset to the clamp configuration. This is used for preventing that the tool hits too near
to the clamps, for example when the thickness of the sheet is low and when hitting near the
clamp, the sheet can result bended.

307
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.14.3 Place the clamps with the mouse

This option allows the user to modify the position of the clamps using the mouse. To do this, the
user must select the points where the clamps will be located. The same number of points must be
entered as the number of clamps the machine contains (see Configure machines - Clamps):

2.4.6.14.4 From Point

This option enables configuration of the parameters of the From point section of a machine:

The from point defines the default values of the initial coordinates relative to the position of the
cutting/punching head.

This start point for cutting/punching can be any of the four corners

Or one middle position specified by X and Y coordinates:

308
Lantek Punch module

Zero point of the CNC equal to the From Point

Select this option to enable the zero point of the CNC as the From Point.

With this option the user can assign to the CNC zero point the loading point after machining
initializing. If the parameter is on, after the machining initialization, the zero point of the CNC and
the loading point will be the same.

Prompt for this data when initializing

As for other parameters, the system can show this configuration window when the Initialization
process is executed.

Initializing the machine: In the nesting module can be done manually using the option Machining-

>Initialize or by clicking on the Initialize Button of the Machining Toolbar

2.4.6.14.5 Move the from point interactively

This allows to change the from point of the machining:

Move with the mouse

The from point position will be changed interactively with the mouse.

Center

The system will change the from point position to the center.

Left

The from point position will be the left side of the work zone.

Right

In this case, the from point will be placed on the right side of the work zone.

309
Lantek Punch module

Fit to the shear zone

This option is useful when the shear work zone is different than the punch ones.
With this parameter, the work zone will be moved until it remains fit to the shear
work zone.

The user can specify an offset between the two work zones.

2.4.6.14.6 Sheet Data

This option enables you to configure the Sheets parameters for a machine.

Sheets margins

This dialogue allows you to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the machine is not
going to cut or punch out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the parts. In the
example shown, the lower margin is larger to avoid the clamp zone.

The X and Y values are the coordinates that the system will take for the selected red point.
Normally this point is the 0,0 because it is the point where the torch will be placed before cutting.

Remnant margin (e.g. 10,000)

When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value here, the remnant will
be created with these margins.

Display sheet reference in status bar

If this parameter is activated, the reference of the sheet will be displayed in the status area while
working on the Nesting.

Sheet state (e.g. 1)

310
Lantek Punch module

Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 = completely flat, 9
= very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it to calculate the
distance that the head must come down in order to cut/punch for trying to avoid collisions with
sheet.

Anti-scratch

This parameter's objective is that the rapid movements are done at more higher distance for not
scratching the sheet. When the movement is from one hole to another with the head down,
instead of the normal height, with this enabled it will go a little higher.

Maximum Length (e.g. 99999,999) and Width (e.g. 99999,999)

When getting one sheet from the database, the system will look in addition to material and
thickness, if the sheet is not bigger than these measures.

Visualize the sheet rotation

With this option the user can visualize the sheet rotated 900, 1800, and 2700. It also allows to
make a sheet symmetry around the X or Y axis. Internally this option rotates the axis, f.i. if the
user rotates 1800 the sign of X and Y will change (X will be positive to the left and Y will be
positive down)

This parameter is not configurable through the system yet. You can configure it modifying the
parameter A266 of the selected machine CT file.

2.4.6.14.7 Upload / Download sheets

With this option you can configure parameters for a machine’s Sheet loading/unloading section.

Process the number of sheets automatically

The system needs information about the way the sheets are loaded onto the machine. If the
loading is automatic, the system will calculate the number of sheets and will order them to loader
when needed.
Number of sheets (e.g. 10)

311
Lantek Punch module

The user can choose the number of sheets which will be loaded into the machine instead of using
the previous parameter which loads the sheets on demand. The sheet loader will load the sheet,
which is machined and then unloaded so many times as the value of this parameter.

Sheet is uploaded automatically

If the machine has an automatic loader, enabling this parameter will allow the system to use it,
but every time the user can choose if the system is going to use it or not depending on:

Sheet uploading = Manual: The system will not use the loader. The process must be done
manually.

Sheet uploading = Automatic: If the Automatic option is selected, the following parameters
appear:

Store Station ( e.g. 3): If the loader system allows it, it is possible to specify the station from
which the sheet will be get.

Sheet peeling: Sometimes, when loading a sheet, the loader gets two sheets instead of just
one. With this active, the loader will execute a cycle of movements to unstuck the sheets.

Double sheet detection: In some loader system there is one sensor for measuring the sheet
width. This can detect if there are more than one sheet. If this happen, the sheet peeling cycle
will be executed again.

Sheet uploading = Lift: If the machine is equipped with a lift system, the sheet upload can be
done with it.

Suction cups are selected automatically: The system will calculate which cups are the best for
uploading the sheet. For selecting them manually, the Suction cups button will show the
window for making it active.

312
Lantek Punch module

Sheet is downloaded automatically

As with uploading, the sheet can be downloaded automatically enabling this option:

Sheet downloading = Manual: In Manual mode, the system can leave the sheet in one position
making easier the downloading task. This position is defined by X and Y coordinates.

Sheet downloading = Automatic: In Automatic mode, the system will download the sheet. Select
the option Enable support if applicable.

There is sheet turn over: With this enabled, the system will know if the loader system can turn
over the sheet.

Turn over the sheet: The loader will perform a turn over when downloading the sheet
automatically if this parameter is enabled.

Sheet downloading = Lift: The sheet will be downloaded using the lift system of the machine. The
X and Y are the coordinates which specify the place for leaving the sheet.

Suction cups are selected automatically: The system will select automatically which cups are
the best for the downloading process.
But if the user wants to select manually , the Suction cups button will show the window for
making it active.

313
Lantek Punch module

Sheet downloading = Grip: The sheet will be downloaded by the grip system of the machine

Prompt for this data when initializing

The machine initialization process must be done always before making any machine instruction.
With this option enabled, the system will show the upload/download sheet dialog always when the
initialization instruction is executed.

Initializing the machine: In the nesting module can be done manually using the option Machining-
>Initialize or clicking on the Initialize Button of the Machining toolbar

2.4.6.14.8 Punching parameters

This window contains the parameters of the punching section of the machine:

Machine power (e.g. 25000,000)

This is the machine punching capacity. This value is very important because the system will use it
to determine if it is possible to punch with a given tool in the specified material and thickness.

Percentage of power required for nibbling (e.g. 100,000)

This is the percentage of the total machine power used when nibbling. Usually, the power
required for nibbling is lower than the required for a simple punching operation.

Keyway angle in auto-index stations (e.g. 45)

314
Lantek Punch module

The auto-index stations are those which can rotate allowing to use the tool in different positions.
The value given here is the angle step that the auto-index stations of the machine can turn. For
example, if the value is 45, the tool placed on the auto-index station can be used in 0, 45, 90, 135
and 180 degrees.

Nibbling tolerance (e.g. 0,300)

This is the nibbling tolerance when doing a nibbling. Also, it can be configured from the
Technology - Tolerance in nibbling option of the menu in the nesting module:

If exists, the system will take the value given in material/thickness dependent data instead of this
value.

Minimum ratio of nibbling step / thickness (e.g. 1,000)

The parameters relate the nibbling step with the sheet thickness.

If this value is 1 the system will not use never a step smaller than the sheet thickness.

The nibbling step is the distance between one punch and the next one:

Tool diagonal factor / thickness (e.g. 1,000)

This value tests the diagonal of the tool and relates it with the sheet thickness for prevent tool
damages. For example if the machine performs a punch with a 2 mm diameter tool in a 4mm
sheet, the tool will be broken.

315
Lantek Punch module

If the value of this parameter is 1, the meaning is that Expert will never use a tool whose diameter
is lower than the sheet thickness. For example, with a 5mm diameter tool the system will not use
it for sheets whose thickness is bigger than 5 mm.

Always display tool placement dialogue

Enabled, Expert will show the turret placement dialogue always before each nesting process.

Update the active turret when saving the sheet

The current/active turret placement will be changed when saving sheets with the current
configuration. This configuration will be shown for the next job.

Automatic tool placement modes

The turret will be filled with the best tool placement depending on the option selected here:

No: No automatic tool placement. The system will show a list with the needed tools and the turret
stations and you must place them manually:

Check for matching tools: When initializing the machining, the system will show the needed tools
but if there are tools which are already placed on the turret and they are useful, they will be kept
for being used in the current job.

316
Lantek Punch module

In the example, this option has not been selected. Enabling it, the system will detect that the
placed RD-12 tool can make the RD-12-1 work and will not ask for it placement.

Place into empty stations: When initializing the machining, Expert will place the needed tools into
empty valid stations and show the rest in the list for manual placement..

Place into unused stations: Expert will show the needed tools, and will place, if possible, them
into empty valid stations. If more stations are needed, Expert will look for non needed placed
tools, and will replace them for needed tools.

Allow tools to be moved if required: Punches can be moved to alternative stations if index station
is required for other tool.

Clearances punch-die (e.g. Minimum 0,000; Maximum 10,000)

Those are the minimum and maximum clearances allowed between punches and dies.

Retract clearance (e.g. Minimum 2,000; Maximum 24,000)

Those are the minimum and maximum height where the tool can move after performing a punch.
In some machines, depending on the used tool, there is a maximum height where it can be
moved. With these parameters, the user can define the minimum and maximum values.

Minimum Y of tool change position (e.g. 200,000)

This is the minimum Y coordinate where a tool change is allowed. This is a safety parameter
which is used to prevent possible collision of the turret with the clamps when spinning for
changing the tool.

317
Lantek Punch module

In the following example, the turret is near the clamp zone, a dangerous location if the machine
needs to change the tool. Expert will test the minimum Y allowed, and will order the turret to go
up at least to this safety Y coordinate to make the tool change:

Update the position of tool change in linear turrets

With this parameter enabled, the system updates the machining with the real position where the
tool is after load it in the turret. For example: the turret is working with a 10mm round tool and the
last punch is on X300, now if the machine needs to punch with the 14mm round tool and it is in
X680 position, when getting it, the head is now in X680. In this case, if this parameter is enabled,
Expert will verify on every moment which is the 14mm nearest hole (it is not the same as before
changing the tool), and reorder the punching sequence.

When enabling, some parameters like reference point appear, select the required reference point
here: Left sheet, Right sheet, Left work zone, Right work zone.

The configuration must be the same as in Clamps configuration - Reference point

First X position 0,000

X position distance 0,000
Y position 0,000

The values of these three parameters must be the same as the values configured on Clamps
Configuration - Positioning section:

First X position = First position (clamps)

X position distance = Number of positions (clamps)

Y position = Position distance (clamps)

Favorite angle for punches that leave the same trace when punching in different angles

318
Lantek Punch module

This option allows defining the angle of the punch in the turret when punching. This will allow
punching zones, which were not available when punching with a punch placed at 0º in the turret.

This parameter only makes sense for machines with all stations multi-index.

Keep tool positions when creating a new sheet

Using this option user can keep the active turret (with the defined tools) when changing from one
one machined sheet to a new sheet.

Prompt for this data when initializing

The machine initialization process must be done always before making any machine instruction.
With this option enabled, the system will show this Punching Parameters dialog always when the
initialization instruction is executed:

Initializing the machine: In the nesting module can be done manually using the option Machining
-> Initialize.

2.4.6.14.9 General machine options

This window contains the parameters of the punching section of the machine:

Acceleration (%) (e.g. 100)

This is the percentage of the speed to work for the current sheet.

Sheet lubrication

Some machines uses different lubrication systems, here the type of lubrication to use should be
configured.

- OFF

- FLOOD

- MIST

- TAPKUL

- ON

319
Lantek Punch module

- ON, INDEX (Enabled)

At the end of the program...

The options enabled here will be executed always after the CNC machining:

Home position: The head will goes to the initial position.

Open clamps: The clamps will be open releasing the sheet.

Raise pin: Raise the Pin for allowing to load the next sheet.

Tool properties

These are the lubrication systems that some machines can use for the tools.

- OFF (Enabled)

- FLOOD

- MIST

- TAPKUL

- ON

- ON, INDEX

With these options the user can configure to work with delays when using tools:

OFF: Disables the delay.

ON: Enables the delay.

ON, BEFORE: The delay will be applied before punching. The head will go to the correct
coordinate, then wait the delay time and finally punch.

ON, AFTER: After giving the punch, the tool is raised, then wait.

Softpunch: Some machines can use a mechanism to control the noise level when working. This
option is only for those machines for enabling the soft punch feature. There are three option: ON ;
OFF ; ON, INDEX (Enabled)

320
Lantek Punch module

Presser foot: This is only for some machines with a special device which press the sheet for
avoiding deformations. For example, sheet deformation can happen if the machine has to punch
a grid of 50x50 holes of 5mm diameter which are very near between them. In that case, the
presser foot can press the sheet during the execution of that difficult punches.

Vacuum: When punching there may appear small sheet pieces which can be evacuated if the
machine has an evacuation method. In this case, the system will use the vacuum system of the
machine.

Whisper tool: This is a tool with wedge-shape instead of plain. It is used for making easier the
sheet break. This tool must work in a bigger height than the normal ones because of the wide-
shape. Enabling this parameter will make the head to work with bigger distance from the sheet.

Offset plunge: The tool will penetrate more than usual into the sheet the distance given here more
when hitting the sheet.

Retract offset: The head is going to work in a bigger height, bigger distance from the sheet
depending on the value of this parameter.

Tool type & Strip detection: Those are machine parameters which will make certain machines to
work in a different way.

Feed rate(%) (e.g. 100): This is the work speed to apply with the tools.

User properties: These are parameters the user can define, and then the postprocessor will load
and treat for making the proper CNC code. They are only used for some special cases.

Crash detection: These are the parameters or property allowed to active for each punch the crash
automatic detection during its tool path. It will always be active and the user will only be able to
deactivate it after the machining.

Semi-pierce deep: This parameter stores the form tool (semi-pierce deep). This will be
configurable for each punch (semi-pierce, forming, rolling rib, rolling offset and rolling louver) or
for each machine.

When a punch is assigned to a machine it will take this value by default. Only the semi-pierce
punches have the possibility to be modified after the machining.

Striker speed

321
Lantek Punch module

With this option the user can limit the striker speed. This value is material/thickness dependent
and will be a percentage and the system will calculate the real speed.

Prompt for this data when initializing

The machine initialization process must be done always before making any machine instruction.
With this option enabled, the system will show this General machine options dialog always when
the initialization instruction is executed:

Initializing the machine: In the nesting module can be done manually using the option Machining -
> Initialize or by clicking on the Initialize Button of the Machining Toolbar

2.4.6.14.10 Tool properties

The system will show the list with all the used punches allowing to view the different parameters
of each tool when doing double click in the desired punch:

Punches Lubrication

RD-10 -> OFF(Enabled)

SQ-20 FLOOD
RE-40x5 MIST
TAPKUL
ON
ON INDEX

View

With this button, the user can access to the parameters of definition of the selected punch:

322
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.14.11 Postprocessor data

The system can be configured for asking some values which will be used by the postprocessor
for generating the CNC code. With this option, the user can change the data of these parameters
before the postprocessor is executed.

2.4.6.15 Do not pass over the clamps

This option makes sure that no process will exceed the clamps at any moment during the
machining process.

2.4.6.16 Labels treatment

Using this option, the user can create labels for generating subprograms. Using the simulation
options, the user can place a begin label in the desired machining position, and then place an end
label in other position. This is useful for the user for defining the subprograms with the needed
instructions.

2.4.6.17 Subprograms treatments

This option allows to execute a part in a subprogram. It will prompt for the number of executions,
and if the user wants to order the machining or leaving the machining part by part.

Rectangular subprograms

With this selection, the user can make rectangular subprograms of the previously defined
machining. After one machined part is clicked, the system will detect automatically how many
parts fits into the sheet:

323
Lantek Punch module

If the Put subprograms in order checkbox is enabled, then the system will order the subprograms
by tools instead of by parts.

To regenerate the machining in only one subroutine. This is possible only after making the
machining with the option "Subroutines treatment" in modify machining.

The parameter depends on the machine which the user as selected.

For cut machine: If the Subprograms by technology is enabled (default), the subroutines are
going to be generated they will be by technology, otherwise the system will create only one
subroutine.

For punch machine: If the Subprograms by tools is enabled, the subroutine are going to be
generated they will be by technology, otherwise the system will create only one subroutine.

With this option the user can define these parameters:

Type: Simple, linear, Grid.

Direction: Horizontal, vertical.

Subprograms by Tool

Part subprograms in the same work zone: With this parameter the user can decide if all the
subprograms by tool of a part will be executed in the work zone or in different work zones.

Subprograms in zig-zag

Add rapid to subprogram

324
Lantek Punch module

Put subprogram in order

Rectangular subprograms for AMADA machine

From the AMADA control, the user is capable to execute only one part instead the whole grid
(mainly to test the quality or dimensions of the part produced). To do this, the definition and the
execution of subroutines must be done in a specific way. This option will also allow executing
longer parts than the work zone and also using common punch

Delete all subprograms

This selection will delete all the generated subprograms. By this way, the CNC code will be longer
because the subprograms allows to optimize the code repeating parts when possible.

2.4.6.18 Delete machining of selected parts

This option will delete automatically all the machining of the selected parts.

For example, with the following sheet:

Selecting the parts and clicking with the right button or the mouse will make the remove of the
machining operations:

325
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.20 Modify chute operation

This option will modify the selected evacuations.

Move the pressing point interactively

When the parameter "Move the pressing point interactively' is on, the user will be able to modify
the pressing point and translate it inside the zone delimited by the "Head 1", "Head 2", "Absolute
pressing" limits and "pressing with regard to extraction point" limits.

With this parameter the user can define. That is to say, this will be the zone where the suction
cups carriage can be moved avoiding collisions.

2.4.6.21 Delete chute operation

This option will erase the selected evacuations.

2.4.6.21 Modify Lead-in/outs

You can set Lead/Lead-outs for your parts here. This consists of two part they are:

1.General

326
Lantek Punch module

Modify Lead-in/Lead-out

This is to modify the lead-in/lead-out position. There are four options:

No modifications

Smooth tool path

This option allows to move the lead-ins/lead-outs automatically to avoid strong movements
between them. That is to say, if after a lead out there is a rapid, the system will try to smooth this
movement by moving the rapid the more tangent as possible to the lead-out.

The parameters are:

Number of passes: Number of times to execute the optimization algorithm.

Number of test for each contour: Number of points in each contour where the system will try to
put the lead in to avoid the strong movements.

It is allowed to reverse contours: Possibility to invert the contours to place the lead in.

Angular error tolerance: Maximum optimal angle. The most optimum is always = 0.

Machine automatically: Do this option automatically after the machining.

Place in one touch figures

This option allows to modify the lead in position and prioritize to placed them in notches.

Place by proximity

Using this parameter the user is allowed to place the lead-in/lead-outs in such a way that the
distance between the lead-out and the next lead-in is reduced to the minimum.

Modify lead-in/lead-out data

Select one of the options here to for modifying lead-in/lead-out data.

Put the lead-in/lead-out in bisector

Put the lead-out like the lead-in

Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments.

2.Apply a GAP

327
Lantek Punch module

Apply a gap in lead in/outs.

With this option the user can apply a GAP (Microjoints at the end of the contour) in all the
contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before ending each contour.

There are two restrictions:

The type of lead in-out:

-Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Segment,

-Lead in = Segment – Lead out = arc.

-Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Segment,

-Lead in = Arc – Lead out = arc.

The angle between the lead in and the contour.

The GAP value can be fix, a percentage of the sheet thickness or an automatic value depending
on the cutter radius (with this option the system allows the user to add an offset in the GAP).

This option is available for cutting and combined machines and it is available in CAD module and
nesting module.

Value (d1):

-Fixed:

-Percentage of sheet thickness:

-Automatic depending on cutter radius:

Offset (d2):

-No:

-Fixed:

-Percentage of cutter radius:

-Percentage of sheet thickness:

328
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.23 Modify the head management

When using the automatic machining option, the system can make the management of the head
depending on the options configured on Automatic machining - Cut - Head raising test.

Using this option, the user can adjust the head management manually with the following
parameters:

Execute every rapid with head up

If enabled, the system will always raise the head before any rapid movement for preventing head
collisions. But if disabled, then the following options appear:

At beginning the head is up

With the state of this checkbox the user can tell the system the initial position desired for the
head.

Maximum hollow/Offset (e.g. 10,000)

When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The distance have different values
depending on the chosen option:

- Maximum hollow: Is the maximum distance inside the hole that the system will allow the head to
pass over

- Offset: Is the maximum distance between the hole and the head movement.

Maximum length with head down (e.g. 99999,999)

This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by the head when is down.

Maximum number of rapid tracts (e.g. 3)

329
Lantek Punch module

The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid holes. For understanding what are the
tracts, the following figure of the right is a rapid movement with three tracts, and the left ones is
the same with five tracts:

Modify leads in/outs

Selecting one option from here will allow the system to change the situation of leads in/outs to
optimize the head management of the machining process.

By parts: Leads will be repositioned for avoiding cut parts in the rapids movement.

By contours: The objective with this configuration is not encounter any cut hole on the rapid
movements.

In this first example, there are two head up inserted for avoiding cut holes:

No modify lead in/out

In the second example, the leads have been modified and between parts there is not any
movement over cut holes:

330
Lantek Punch module

Modify lead -in/out by parts

In the last example, the best lead placement has been obtained: Rapid movements are the
shortest, and all the cut holes are evaded:

Modify lead -in/out by contours

Retain lead in/outs defined in part

If this parameter is enabled and there are lead-in/lead-out already assigned to the part, the
system will no try to change them.

Head up at end of each part

When the machining process of a part has been done, the system will send an order to the
machine for lifting the head.

Head up for common cut elements

The special case of common cut elements is what this option configures. When a common cut
element has been finalized, the head will go up.

331
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.24 Delete every head up/down instruction

Cancels and deletes every generated head up/down instructions.

2.4.6.25 Modify head management of rapids

This option will introduce a head up/down instruction just before the the clicked rapid movements:

2.4.6.26 Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble

moves

Using this option will make all the cycles and nibble hits of the sheets be performed in alternate
sequence:

For applying this change only in the exterior cycles and nibble moves, use the Apply alternate
strokes on all the exterior cycles and nibble moves

332
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.27 Apply alternate strokes on all the exterior cycles and

nibble moves

Using this option will make all the cycles and nibble hits of the sheets be performed in alternate
sequence:

This change will be made only on the exterior punching sequences. For making it in all the
punching sequences of the sheet, use
the Apply alternate strokes on all the cycles and nibble moves option.

2.4.6.28 Modify movements

This option allows to change the rapid movements trajectory. For using it, the user should click
one rapid movement and move it using the mouse.

This is very useful for avoiding manually that the turret pass over a dangerous zone:

2.4.6.29 Modify compensation

Normally, the user defines which compensation type is going to use for all the machining process
in the Automatic machining - Cut section of the machine configuration.

This option allows to modify applied compensation parameters for the contours of all the parts
nested on the sheet:

333
Lantek Punch module

Compensation type

There are two different types of compensation: by system, or by numeric control. Depending on
the selected option, the system needs different parameters to be filled.

System compensation

If the system compensation option is checked, then the system provides a checkbox for making
the change just in the common cut contours or not. If so, it needs to know if will be applied in the
main contours or in all the contours of the common cut machining:

Only in common cut contours

If system compensation is applied only in common cut contours, then it needs to know whether it
will be applied in the main contours or in all the contours.

The system compensation needs the cutter radius for making the compensation calculation.

Holes
Cutter 1,000
radius
Parts
Cutter 1,000
radius

CN compensation

If CN compensation option is checked, it will leave the calculations to be made by the numeric
control, but it needs the indexes for being used with holes and parts.
Holes
Compensation 1
index
Parts
Compensation 2
index

334
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.30 Modify the compensation of a contour

Normally, the user defines which compensation type is going to use for all the machining process
in the Automatic machining - Cut (See page XXXX) section of the machine configuration.

This option allows to modify applied compensation parameters in the clicked contours.

Compensate

When a contour is clicked, the system needs to know if the compensation changes will be applied
just in the selected contour, on the holes of the part from where that contour belongs, on the
outside of the part from where the contour belongs, or in the whole part of the clicked contour.

System compensation

If the contour has already assigned compensation by system, then here the user can change the
compensation mode.

CN compensation

If the compensation mode of the contour is by numeric control, here the user can change the side
and give a new compensation index for the CN: (e.g. Compensation - 2)

This change can be done in more than just the clicked part depending on the option chosen in
Make on.

For example, with the following group of parts, if clicking in the signed one:

335
Lantek Punch module

Depending on the chosen option, the change will be applied to the pointed parts:

2.4.6.31 Quality dependent compensations

Using this parameter the user can apply system compensation and/or control corrections
depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option will allow to define
the following parameters with different for each quality.
• Corrector for holes
• Corrector for exteriors
• Compensation radius for holes
• Compensation radius for exteriors
The user will also be able to distinguish between:
• Main contours in no common cut.
• Main contours in common cut.
• Auxiliary contours in common cut.
This option is only available for cutting machines. The configuration parameters for this option
can be defined material and thickness dependant

2.4.6.32 Avoid hits with form tools

The user can configure to make this operation every time the automatic machining is executed in
Configure punching machines - Automatic machining - Nested punch configuration.

Avoid hits with form tools when working with a form tool

Depending on the tool shape (Press form / Semi pierce), when hitting, the sheet may leave raised
in the hit point. It is not convenient to pass over these hit points because if the head is near to the
sheet, it can collide resulting in damages.

336
Lantek Punch module

For configure properly this option there are two parameters:

For avoiding these problematic hits, the system will try to modify the head movements always
limited by the maximum value allowed here. The following is an example of what tracts means to
the system:

When avoiding this punches the system will keep always a security margin (the value of this
parameter). This means that the head is not going to pass just very near these hits.

2.4.6.33 Delete machining of selected parts

This option will delete automatically all the machining of the selected parts.

For example, with the following sheet:

Selecting the parts and clicking with the right button or the mouse will make the remove of the
machining operations:

337
Lantek Punch module

2.4.6.34 Modify the reposition point

Once the machining has been done, if using this option, the system will ask again for the
reposition point. It is used for changing the place where the head or the pistons have been lower
for reposition.

2.4.6.35 Modify the zero point of the sheet

This option will modify the selected evacuations.

2.4.6.36 Retract clearance in punches

Modify retract clearance in punches

Allows to change the work height of a tool.

Duplicate punches at different heights

Allows to place duplicated punches at different heights.

Delete punches with retract clearance

It will erase the punches with certain work height.

Modify punches with retract clearance

Modifies the height of the punches which already have a certain work height configured.

338
Lantek Punch module

2.4.7 Optimize machining (punching)

This option allows to optimize some machining parameters by means of the following dialogue:

Delete non-used tools

This option deletes all the non-used punches from the punching program.

Optimize punch changes

This option optimizes the machining by minimizing the punch changes.

2.4.8 Delete machining

This option allows to delete the desired machining instructions. When selecting an element of a
macro machining from all the selection mode (except All machining) the user can choose whether
all the macro will be deleted or just the selected element by using the checkbox Delete the macro
as a whole.

Current instruction

Deletes the current machining instruction. The user can move between the machining sequence
using the Simulation options.

Machining by selection

When the user clicks on any contour of the part, all the machining of that contour will be deleted:

Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved

This option is to simulate the machining toolpath selection with the mouse is moved (only
available to delete machining by selection and geometry selection options). The system will use
the color configure for selections.

Machining by selection of geometry

In this case, the selection mode allows to delete the machining of all the selected geometries:

339
Lantek Punch module

When Machining by selection of geometry is enabled, there are two more option;

1.Delete the macro as a whole.

2.Simulate machining selection when mouse is moved: With this option the user can simulate the
machining toolpath selection with the mouse is moved (only available to delete machining by
selection and geometry selection options). The system will use the color configure for selection.

From-to

Deletes several machining instructions using the next two steps:

1. Select the first instruction to be deleted from the list with the left button of the mouse.
2. Hold down the <SHIFT> or <CTRL> key while selecting the last instruction to be deleted
All machining

It deletes all the machining of the sheet including the initialization.

2.5 Technology

2.5.1 Speed rates

2.5.2 CN compensation

2.5.3 System compensation

2.5.4 Tolerance in nibbling

2.5.5 Reposition

2.5.6 Clamp movement

2.5.7 Sheet turn over

2.5.8 Work chute

2.5.9 Chute assignment

2.5.10 Box assign

2.5.11 Postprocessor words

340
Lantek Punch module

2.5.12 Change cutting direction

2.5.13 Lead-in/Lead-outs

2.5.14 Micro-joints

2.5.15 Loops

2.5.16 Bridges

2.5.17 Cut technology

2.5.18 Contour attributes

2.5.1 Speed rates

With this option the user can modify the punching machine’s path speed (mm./m.):
• Cut speed
• Chamfered speed
• Powder mark speed
• Drill mark speed
• Pen mark speed
• Cut mark speed
• Rapid speed

2.5.2 Turrets

Allows to select with which turret the system is going to work (active or one of defined Standard
Turret). Previously, the Standard turrets for the current machine should be created.

2.5.3 Tolerance in nibblings

This option allows the to assign tolerance to a part.

If no tolerance is assigned to the part, this value will be taken from the tolerance configured for
the machine in the punching parameters section, or, if any configuration exists, in
material/thickness dependent data - punching parameters.

341
Lantek Punch module

2.5.4 Reposition

This option allows the user to carry our hand-operated repositions. The user must select the
positioning point of the pistons, headstock or shear and a positioning point for the operation area
must be selected:

2.5.5 Sheet turn over

This option enables configuration of the parameters in the Sheet turn over section of the machine:

Turn over type

This parameter has two option

-Manual rotation of 1800

-Manual symmetry

342
Lantek Punch module

Cancel reposition when executing the turn over

Using this option the user can cancel reposition. If there were any reposition before the turnover
of a sheet, after making the turnover, all the reposition will be cancelled keeping the working zone
as it was at the beginning.

Offset of the work zone after the turn over

With this option, after the turnover of the sheet, the system will apply an offset to the working
zone, which means that the working zone will be a little bit displaced from its position before the
turnover.

This parameter is only useful if the contact point of the sheet and the machine pin are not
coincident with the initial sheet border. In this case the sheet will be separates in X from its initial
position.

2.5.6 Work chutes

Here the user can define how the parts will be evacuated in manual or semiautomatic methods:

Manual

The user will go clicking one by one the evacuation method of each part (is the same if the part is
equal to already evacuated ones)

Semiautomatic

The user specifies how one part will be evacuated, and then the system can apply this
configuration to all the equal parts placed in the same sheet.

Automatic

The system will detect the best evacuation method for the parts and will apply them automatically.

Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

With this option the user can do automatic evacuations to lengthen exterior nibble cycles. This
parameter will be only available in STOP, LIFT, or TRAP evacuations. only in Automatic and
Semi-automatic evacuation.

343
Lantek Punch module

Move the sheet to the trap

Using this option the user can move the sheet to the trap when extracting the parts by trap. This
option inserts a rapid after finishing the outside punching and before extracting the part to place it
totally inside the trap zone (if it is possible).

This option is now available for punching and combined machines.

Move the pressing point interactively

When the user is in semiautomatic mode then the parameter "Move the pressing point
interactively' is on, the user will be able to modify the pressing point and translate it inside the
zone delimited by the "Head 1", "Head 2", "Absolute pressing" limits and "pressing with regard to
extraction point" limits.

With this parameter the user can define. That is to say, this will be the zone where the suction
cups carriage can be moved avoiding collisions.

In this the user can configure the Lift evacuation with punch exterior technology. In previous, for
combinated machines, the evacuations where only available if the exterior contour was defined
as cut technology. From this version on, parts can be evacuated manually and/or automatically
even if they have punch technology in external contours.

2.5.7 Chute assignment

This option allows to configure the chute assignment (in the case the machine has this capacity)
of the parts that the user selects. The system provides a powerful automatic way for the
evacuation management with the Technology - Work chutes (See page XXXXXX)option of the
menu.

The user can configure the type of sorting (None, Stop, Trap or Special Trap), as well as the
number of the trap and the number of the box where the selected parts will be stored.

If this option is used in the nesting module, it has no influence in the generated program.

Move the pressing point interactively

344
Lantek Punch module

When user is in semiautomatic mode then the parameter "Move the pressing point interactively' is
on, the user will be able to modify the pressing point and translate it inside the zone delimited by
the "Head 1", "Head 2", "Absolute pressing" limits and "pressing with regard to extraction point"
limits.

With this parameter the user can define. That is to say, this will be the zone where the suction
cups carriage can be moved avoiding collisions.

2.5.8 Box assignment

This option allows the to assign manually a determined box to the selected parts. The system
provides a powerful automatic way for the evacuation management with the Technology - Work
chutes option of the menu.

This option must be enabled when in an already machined sheet the user wants to change the
box of one part.

Number of box (3)

The clicked parts will be assigned to be evacuated into the number of box given here.

The system allows to assign the box just in the selected part, in the identical parts placed with the
same angle or in all the identical parts: In the following schema, the parts which will change if
clicking in the upper-left ones depending on the selected option are pointed with an arrow:

2.5.9 Punch attributes

With this option the user can assign “Punch attributes” to the punch instructions.

345
Lantek Punch module

When selecting one punch instruction, the system will display all its attributes and the user will be
able to modify them. If the user selects many instructions at the same time the system will only
display the attributes of the first one and the modifications will be applied to all the selected parts.

If the instruction selected does not have punch attributes, the system will display the attributes of
the punch used to make the instruction

If the instruction does not have any punch assigned, the system will display

2.5.10 Postprocessor words

This option enables to introduce special instructions associated with the postprocessor in the
machining program. Once this option is selected, select one of the post words that are displayed
in the list by double-clicking or positioning the cursor and clicking on OK. The selected
postprocessor word will be introduced just behind the current instruction of the program (see
Simulation: Program), just like any other machining instruction:

2.6 View

2.6.1 Orthogonal F2

2.6.2 Parts list

2.6.3 Snap modes

346
Lantek Punch module

2.6.4 Simulation speed

2.6.5 Zoom window F4

2.6.6 Zoom scale F5

2.6.7 Zoom previous F7

2.6.8 Zoom all F8

2.6.9 Zoom dynamic

2.6.10 Redraw F9

2.6.11 Full screen F10

2.6.12 Run F11

2.6.13 Sheet simulation F12

2.6.14 Settings

2.6.15 Tool bars

2.6.1 Orthogonal

When the orthogonal mode is activated, it will only be possible to draw vertical and horizontal
lines. If an attempt is made to draw an inclined line, the system will not permit it.

Once selected, this option remains active until deselected. To select or deselect this option select
the Orthogonal option in the View menu or hit the key F2.

2.6.2 Parts list

This option shows/hides a window containing the list of parts to be machined in an job.

Every part has two boxes over it: the one on the left shows the amount of parts to be machined
and the one on the right shows the amount of parts already machined.

347
Lantek Punch module

Also, if the part is blocked, it will appear with a red X over it, and if there are not available parts
because all of them have been placed in the sheet, with a green circle:

When the user drags the mouse on any part in the part list window as shown above, the part
name and part dimensions will be displayed in the tool tip. If the system is in mm, the system will
display 3 decimal position and if the system is in inches, the system will display 5 decimal
positions.

The user can access to the contextual menu clicking with the right button of the mouse over the
part list. The available options are:

New: The system will open the drawing module allowing to create a new part which will be
automatically inserted into the job.

Open: The selected part will be edited in the drawing module

Block: The part will appear blocked and will not be used for the nesting until is unblocked again.

Delete: The part will be deleted from the job, but not from the database.

Quantity: The user can increase the quantity of available parts from this part list.

Priority: When doing automatic nesting process, the system will try to place first the parts with
higher priority.

Properties: From the part list it is possible to edit the part properties using this option.

Group/Block: The user can BLOCK or UNBLOCK several parts together. By activating this option
the selected part will change their status.

348
Lantek Punch module

View: With this option the user will be able to select Large icon (existent mode) and List. Using
this list mode, the parts will be displayed on a grid with the following information:

Part reference and an icon showing the status of the part. the possible status are:

Pending quantity > 0< Blocked part

Pending quantity = 0 Closed part
Pending quantity < 0 Wrong part

The rest of the columns can be configured by the user in Part List table.

Order: The order the parts are shown in the part list can be changed from here

Size: In the part list there is a bitmap representation of each part, the size of this small draw can
be changed here.

2.6.3 Snap modes

The CAD/CAM module of the system provides different powerful methods for making the edition
easier. One are the Snap Points which will determine how the user can catch and specific point
for the CAD/CAM operations.

There is always one Snap Point mode selected from the toolbar:

Picked Point: The system will select the point where the mouse has been clicked.

Center point: if the cursor is placed in a circular element, like an arc, the point will be the
center of that element. If not, the point is the center of the contour:

349
Lantek Punch module

Center point contour: This option acts like the previous one, but it will always select the
center of the contour:

Near Point: When the cursor is placed near geometries, if this mode is selected, the system
will catch the points of that geometry as soon as the circle cursor contains it:

End Point: The captured point will be the outermost one of the geometry nearest to the
cursor:

Intersection Point: The cursor will get the point where two or more geometries cuts together:

350
Lantek Punch module

Middle point: The system will capture the point of the middle of the geometry. In the
following example, the system catches the middle point of the upper segment of the rectangle:

Tangent point: When the cursor pass over a circle, the system will select the tangent point to
that circle depending on the geometry the user is drawing. In the example, the system calculates
the tangent point to the segment:

Projected point: when drawing a segment, the system will choose the point where that
segment is perpendicular to the contour where the cursor is placed:

Quadrant point: When the cursor pass over a circle, the system will select the quadrant point
nearest to the cursor:

351
Lantek Punch module

Mixed point: The mixed point uses various snap modes at the same time. It selects centres
of arcs or circles as well as end points and intersections. If it finds no geometry it positions itself
on the point it is on.

When the system asks for a point, you can also type it in directly. When you start to type the point
coordinates, a dialog box will appear where you can define both the point coordinates and the
mode in which you wish to define them.

Now the user is having special access to origin point (0.0,0.0). If the point access type is
Combined or Intersection, the coordinate's origin (0.0,0.0) will be considered as a special point,
and while moving the mouse next to the origin it will be shown as active point.

With this option it is possible for the user to access to any geometry element of the active sheet
and/or remnant with the snap point option.

2.6.4 Simulation speed

The system will show in the screen the toolbar which allows to change the simulation speed:

2.6.5 Zoom window

Enables use of a rectangle to select of the area to be enlarged. The center of the window
becomes the center of the screen and the interior area is enlarged or reduced to the maximum.
The points can be introduced by typing the co-ordinates or using the mouse.

To access this option, select the Zoom window option in the View menu or hit the key F4:

352
Lantek Punch module

There are other zoom types, see View (See page XXXX)

2.6.6 Zoom scale

Reduces or enlarges the visualization of the drawing depending on the given values.

1,5 : 1,0000

The system will perform a zoom in the proportions given. In the example, the system will make a
50% zoom-in because the proportion is 1,5 : 1.

If the given value is lower than 1, then the operation will be zoom-out. For example, with a value
of 0,5:1, the system will make a 50% zoom-out.

There are other zoom types, see View.

2.6.7 Previous zoom

Enables recovery of the previous screen. In zoom mode use this option to return to the previous
screen visualization.

To access this option, select the option Zoom previous in the View menu or hit the key F7.

There are other zoom types, see View.

353
Lantek Punch module

2.6.8 Zoom all

This option changes the visualization so that all the drawing fills the screen. It will be enlarged or
reduced in function of the limits of the screen. To access this option, select the Zoom all option in
the View menu or hit the key F8.

There are other zoom types, see View..

2.6.9 Zoom dynamic

This option permits to do a dynamic zoom. These are the steps:

1. Click the zoom dynamic button, and a window with a X will appear:

2. Click the left button of the mouse and move the mouse until getting the desired window size:

354
Lantek Punch module

3. Click again on the left button of the mouse. For changing the window size, just repeat steps
1, 2 and 3.
4. Move the mouse to the area to extend and click the right button of the mouse:

There are other zoom types, see View.

2.6.10 Redraw

Redraws all the elements of the drawing. Elements that have served as aids to draw any element,
but that do not form any part of the drawing will disappear.

To access this option, select the Redraw option in the View menu or hit the key F9:

355
Lantek Punch module

2.6.11 Full screen

The system will show in the screen to activate/deactivate this view, by pressing F10.

2.6.12 Run

With this option, the system will make a visual simulation of all the machining process including
repositions, rapid movements, evacuations...:

To access this option, select the Run option in the View menu or hit the key F11.

The user can select the simulation speed with the View - Simulation speed (See page XXXXX)
option of the menu. Also the Simulation menu allows to select multiple options when making the
simulation.

For help about the simulation menu, select the correct link:

2.6.13 Sheet simulation

Visualizes the drawing on a sheet. It changes the background color to simulate a sheet.

356
Lantek Punch module

Once selected, this option remains active until deselected. To select or deselect this option select
the Sheet simulation option in the View menu or hit the key F12.

2.6.14 Settings (Configure Draw and Nest - General )

In this window, the user can configure how the Draw and Nest module shows the different
elements on the screen.

Selection by window/capture/trap

Enabled, when the user goes selecting the parts (for erase, copy, move...) they will go changing
of color making the visualization easier:

Simulate selection when mouse is moved

Enabled, when the mouse pass over a segment, it will change of color showing which contour will
be selected if the mouse is clicked:

Show micro-joints

357
Lantek Punch module

Enabled, the microjoints will be shown and an exterior line will appear in the contours. This
parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch. For this, the distance
between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the configured tool for the
exteriors.

Show micro-joints with points

The system will simulate the micro-joints with two points showing where they are placed:

Display all clamp and work zones

Enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all the work zones, and the clamps in the
configured positions:

The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown. Enabled, the current

358
Lantek Punch module

station's clamp work zone will be shown with continuous line, and the rest with discontinuous
lines:

Display fixed positions points of the clamp

If this parameter is enabled, the system will show the fixed position of the clamps.

NOTE: This is only valid if the clamps work with fixed positions (See sheet Clamps configuration
(See page XXXX)).

Show part references on screen

The part references will be included inside the part's contour. This will not change the machining
of the parts, is only a visualization option:

Show part references on screen

The reference which is shown will be the configured on Nesting - Utilities - Configure - Draw and
Nest - Print section (See page XXXXX).

Show remnant references on screen

When a remnant is generated and if this option is enabled, the system will show the assigned
reference inside it:

359
Lantek Punch module

Show remnant references on the screen

Show part texts on the sheet

From the drawing module it is possible to assign a description text which will have no machining
effect. The way of doing this is using the Utilities - Text option of the menu. For example, in the
following part we included the "Kok 27-06-2002" text:

This text will be shown or not depending on the configuration of this parameter:

Display dimensions on the sheet

Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will be always shown, the user can decide
to keep them in the nesting module or not:

360
Lantek Punch module

Display dimensions on the sheet

Show non cut contours on the sheet

The system provides an option for assigning non-cut technology to the contours. This means that
these contours will not be machined unless this assigned technology changes.

For example, from the drawing module the interior circle will be assigned with non-cut technology
using the Technology - Cut Technology option of the menu:

Depending on the value of this parameter, these non-cut geometries will be shown or not:

Simulate the full remnants

Enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the identification easier:

361
Lantek Punch module

Move the offset of the part on the sheet

When getting a part from the list, the system will show additional lines from the margin of the part
showing the minimum distance between parts:

Show the direction of movements

Enabled will make the system to show with an arrow the direction of every rapid movement:

Selection with multi-torch

When the machine has been configured as multi-torch, the system will make the nesting trying to
use the maximum number of torches. If this option is enabled, when one part is selected, the
system will select the entire multi-torch group (the parts which will be done at the same time as
the selected):

362
Lantek Punch module

Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch

When Selection with multitorch is enabled then this parameter is highlighted.

With this option the user can avoid selection by multitorch when a window is being selected
(capture and/ or trap).

Show selected machining

This option allows to visualize the selected machining.

Postprocessor words

From this window the user can define which text the system will show on sheet when one of the
functions is selected or the user will be able to configure the font and size for all the
postprocessor words which are displayed on the sheet. if none is specified, the system will use
the windows standard font and size configured by default on the computer.

These parameters allow visualizing or hiding postprocessor words without changing the text of
these words. This option will be available from Nesting and Machining module and CAD module.

Trap trap Coolnt on coolnt/on

Open trap trap/open Coolnt off coolnt/off
Close trap trap/close Coolnt coolnt/flood
flood
Lift lift Coolnt coolnt/mist
mist
Unconditional halt Coolnt coolnt/tapkul
stop tapkul
Head up head/up Air on air/on
Head down head/down Air off air/off

363
Lantek Punch module

Macro start Speed fedrat/

Macro end Multitorch

Font

Note: The user can configure if the number of the multitorch is displayed or not.

Highlight selected part

When the user select a part in the Nesting part list window/at the list of parts window, the
geometry of the selected part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is
activated/enabled.

In the same way, if the user selects any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight it on the list
of parts window (with the frame) and all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This highlighted
color can be configured in the color window.

Simulation

From this window the user can define the shear movement while machining simulation.

With this option user can is allowed to define three different movements:

On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.

First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will be moved first in horizontal or vertical and
then the other.

Head radius: With this option the user can define the radius.

2.6.15 Toolbars

This option permits to configure which tool bars are visible. Depending on the module we are
working on (Main, Design, Nesting and Machining), the list of the tool bars will be different. To
display the desired toolbars the user needs to click on their check boxes and click OK.

Besides of the main toolbars, the user can define new ones using the Personalize (See also
XXXXX) button.

364
Lantek Punch module

2.7 Simulation

2.7.1 Program

2.7.2 ISN position

2.7.3 Mouse positioning

2.7.4 Next

2.7.5 Previous

2.7.6 Begin

2.7.7 End

2.7.8 Next reposition

2.7.9 Previous reposition

2.7.10 Next multitorch

2.7.11 Previous multitorch

2.7.12 Next chute

2.7.13 Previous chute

With this option the user can configure different simulation windows. A toolbar at the bottom side
of the simulation window will offer new possibilities and options to improve the simulation.

Start simulation: This icon runs the simulation starting from the current point. (F11, Runs the
simulation from the beginning).

Pause simulation: Stops the simulation at the current point. The systems waits for a

or to continue.

Stop simulation: Stops the simulation. Similar to ESC key.

365
Lantek Punch module

Next step: Goes on one step and goes to PAUSE again.

Simulate next instruction: Runs the simulation until it finish the next instruction. After that it
goes to PAUSE.

Begin: Shortcut to Simulation > Begin

Previous: Shortcut to Simulation > Previous

Next: Shortcut to Simulation > Next

End: Shortcut to Simulation > End

Change mode: Changes the window display mode:

2.7.1 Program

This option displays all the instructions of the machining program on the screen and enables
positioning using the up and down arrow keys, page up and page down, or selecting the
instruction as desired with the mouse.

366
Lantek Punch module

Print

It is possible to print the program.

Note: The oxy-cutting and plasma postprocessors generate a stop in the program when it is time
for a multi-burner change. This way the user can place the burners according to the printed report

2.7.2 ISN Position

This option takes to the machining instruction corresponding to the line number entered:

2.7.3 Mouse positioning

This option enables to be positioned on the machining instruction as desired using the mouse.

For example, if you want to be positioned just after the machining of a contour, select this option
and click on the contour:

367
Lantek Punch module

2.7.4 Next

This option enables to advance an instruction in the machining program placing it after the current
instruction:

2.7.5 Previous

This option enables to move an instruction back in the machining program placing it prior to the
current instruction:

368
Lantek Punch module

2.7.6 Begin

This option enables to be positioned on the first instruction of the machining program:

2.7.7 End

This option enables to be positioned in the last instruction of the machining program:

369
Lantek Punch module

2.7.8 Next tool

This option allows the user to gain access to the simulation program (see Simulation - Program)
to the following punch change. It goes to the last use of the current tool and just on the beginning
of next one:

2.7.9 Previous tool

This option allows the user to gain access to the simulation program (see Simulation - Program)
to the previous punch change:

370
Lantek Punch module

2.7.10 Next reposition

This option allows to navigate in the simulation program to the next reposition. (see Simulation:
Program):

2.7.11 Previous reposition

This option allows to the user to navigate in the simulation program to the previous reposition.
(see Simulation: Program):

371
Lantek Punch module

2.8 Utilities

2.8.1 Time and cost...

2.8.2 Distances and angles

2.8.3 Angle between three points

2.8.4 View geometry

2.8.5 Special display

2.8.6 View system status

2.8.7 Configure

2.8.8 Personalize

2.8.1 Time and cost

The system provides a way for making the estimation of cost and time of the current job. This
option will not work properly unless the user makes the configurations in the Time calculation
(cutting (See page XXXX)or punching (See page XXXX)) and Cost calculation (cutting (See
page XXXX)or punching (See page XXXX)) sections of the machine configuration.

This value will only be used when creating the part. Once the part has been created, the material
cost will be calculated depending on the area type stored in the database for each part. This
value will be only changeable for the parts stored in the database

This option will show the different time and cost calculation screens, and it is also possible to
define the area (rectangular, real...) by default when creating a product.

372
Lantek Punch module

2.8.2 Distances and angles

This option enables to check the distance and the angle between two points. Once the option is
selected, select the two points and the system will inform of the absolute distance (D), the
distance in X, the distance in Y and the angle (W) between the two points:

2.8.3 Angle between three points

Shows the angle made by three points defined by the user:

373
Lantek Punch module

2.8.4 View geometry

This option allows the user to view the information of the selected geometry: Type of geometry,
Point or center. point coordinates, initial and final point coordinates, radius, element length and
initial and final angles. It also calculates the overall length of the geometry in meters.

Select geometry to verify

Total perimeter = 0,207 m.

The previous example is for just one geometry (the arc), but the user can select as many
geometries as wanted, and the system will show the different lengths in the list:

Select geometry to verify

374
Lantek Punch module

Total perimeter = 1,359 m.

The user can also print the viewed data pressing the button Print.

2.8.5 Special display

Using this option, the colors will be automatically assigned to the parts or to the punches. The
user cannot assign them to any part/tool, the system will do it in automatic.

2.8.6 View system status in nesting

1.8.11.1 Active tool

1.8.11.2 Used tools

1.8.11.3 Current turret

1.8.11.4 Current status

1.8.11.5 Clamp and work zone

1.8.11.6 System efficiency

1.8.11.7 Verify the machining

1.8.11.8 Show the machining of a tool

375
Lantek Punch module

2.8.6.1 Active tool

This option displays the operative punch data at that moment.

2.8.6.2 Used tools

This option allows the user to view the list of punches used in machining. To do this the user
disposes of:

Angles

If this option is enabled, it will display a list of the punches, differentiating them according to the
different angles used.

Number of punching operations

If this option is validated, it will list the amount of performed punching operations for every punch,
indicating if they are nibbling punches or not:

Punches Angles No of
punch hits
RD-10 0.0 245
SQ-16 0.0 60
RE-40x5 90.0 284

376
Lantek Punch module

2.8.6.3 Current turret

The current turret configuration will be shown in the screen with the different features of each
station. Also, the user can see what punches are placed in the turret in every moment.

When one punch is selected, clicking on the View button will make the system to show the
different parameters of the placed tool:

2.8.6.4 Current status (punching)

It shows the system status: units, loading point, present point, Station (number of Multitool (if it is
0, it is not a Multitool station) and if it is Autoindex), tolerance or pitch of groovings and speed.
This is just information, and no parameters can be modified.

To gain access to speeds, press the button Feed Rates.

2.8.6.5 Clamps and work zone

With this option the system will show dialogue box with information about:

CLAMPS: Locations and zone, and if the fixed position of the clamps will be shown or not.

377
Lantek Punch module

WORK ZONE: Length and Width, Minimum and Maximum X and Y coordinates in the current part
reposition, and the added reposition which is the sheet's current point of origin:

Clamp location Clamp zone

625.000000 Left 70,000
1250.000000 Right 70,000
1875.000000 Upper 40,000
Work zone
Length 2.500,000 Width 1.250,000
Minimum -10,000 Maximum 2.510,000
X X
Minimum -10,000 Maximum 1.260,000
Y Y
Added reposition 0,000
Simulate the fixed positions of the clamps (Enabled)

2.8.6.6 System efficiency

With this option, the system will display a dialogue box with information about the system
efficiency (utilization of sheets for the performed task) and the number of machined sheets.

Number of 1
sheets
Total 76,35
efficiency

2.8.6.7 Verify the machining

With this option, the system will test that the machining process has been done properly looking
if:

- All the parts and contours are machined

- There are not overlapping between parts

- There are not leads, micro-joints, loops, etc, which overlaps with other elements

378
Lantek Punch module

The system will show a message with the result of the test showing where the error is, if any:

All machining on the sheet has been executed

And if the system finds any problem, it will show a warning message and will mark the
problematic zones with other color, and if the visualization is too small, with green points:

WARNING !
Not every machining of the sheet has been executed

The dark gray color contours means that the test has been successful.

2.8.6.8 Show machining of a tool

With this option, the system will present a list with all the used tools. If the user selects one, the
system will show only the machining of the selected tool. No machining instructions will be
deleted, this is just a visualization option.

For example:

379
Lantek Punch module

For showing again the machining of all the tools, the user must go back to this option and select
in the punches list <All>.

2.8.7 Configure (cutting)

From this point you can configure operative task parameters for the current order and other
general nesting parameters, which may also be configured from a more general level (Machine
configuration). To configure parameters for a given section double-click on it or position the
mouse on the desired section and push the OK button. These sections are:

2.8.7.1 Part rotations

2.8.7.2 Assign boxes to part

2.8.7.3 Sheet parameters

2.8.7.4 Automatic nesting

2.8.7.5 Automatic machining

2.8.7.6 Common cutting parameters

2.8.7.7 Part list table

380
Lantek Punch module

2.8.7.1 Part rotations

Selecting a part to configure from the part list, the following dialogue will appear where the user
can activate or deactivate the selected part rotation:

It is a filler part

If this parameter is enabled, then the system will place this part only when the others have been
already nested on the sheet. Also, if It is to fill in hollows parameter is enabled, then the part will
only be placed inside other part's holes.

The only difference lies in the option Automatic nesting since a new sheet is never opened if
there are only filler pieces left.

2.8.7.2 Assign boxes to parts

From this option the user can assign the boxes from where the parts will be evacuated. The way
of making this is clicking a part from the part listand selecting the proper options from the
dialogue:

381
Lantek Punch module

There are two different sections: normal and symmetrics. On both, the user can configure
different boxes depending on the angle they are placed on the sheet.

The arrow buttons allows to make this configuration faster if the box is the same. For example,
filling the 0 degrees normal position with the box number 2 and clicking on the down button will
make the system to fill all the rotation fields with the same number.

Also, the user can choose to apply the changes just in the current sheet, or for every sheet of the
job.

2.8.7.3 Sheet parameters

This option enables you to configure the Sheets parameters for a machine.

Sheets margins

This dialogue allows you to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the machine is not
going to cut or punch out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the parts. In the
example shown, the lower margin is larger to avoid the clamp zone.

The X and Y values are the coordinates that the system will take for the selected red point.
Normally this point is the 0,0 because it is the point where the torch will be placed before cutting.

382
Lantek Punch module

Remnant margin (e.g. 10,000)

When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value here, the remnant will
be created with these margins.

Display sheet reference in status bar

If this parameter is activated, the reference of the sheet will be displayed in the status area while
working on the Nesting.

Sheet state (e.g. 1)

Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 = completely flat, 9
= very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it to calculate the
distance that the head must come down in order to cut/punch for trying to avoid collisions with
sheet.

Anti-scratch

This parameter's objective is that the rapid movements are done at more higher distance for not
scratching the sheet. When the movement is from one hole to another with the head down,
instead of the normal height, with this enabled it will go a little higher.

Maximum Length (e.g. 99999,999) and Width (e.g. 99999,999)

When getting one sheet from the database, the system will look in addition to material and
thickness, if the sheet is not bigger than these measures.

Visualize the sheet rotation

With this option the user can visualize the sheet rotated 900, 1800, and 2700. It also allows to
make a sheet symmetry around the X or Y axis. Internally this option rotates the axis, f.i. if the
user rotates 1800 the sign of X and Y will change (X will be positive to the left and Y will be
positive down)

This parameter is not configurable through the system yet. You can configure it modifying the
parameter A266 of the selected machine CT file.

383
Lantek Punch module

2.8.7.4 Process punches out of the part

When the part to be configured is selected from the part list, the following dialogue box appears,
permitting you to enable or disable the option of punching outside the part:

When this option is selected the system tests if any of the punching is outside the limits of the
punching technology assigned to the part.

2.8.7.5 Automatic nesting

With this option you can configure automatic nesting parameters.

The configuration made here will be applied when the user makes the nesting process
automatically, this is on nesting module using one of the automatic options: Nesting module ->
Nesting -> Do all/One sheet/Semi-automatic/Place ().

Also, this dialogue can be shown from the Nesting module allowing the user change the
configuration and make tests faster: Utilities -> Configure -> Automatic nesting.

General

Precision

The Precision bar fits the exactness of the nesting. Also if the Precision x 10 checkbox is
enabled, the precision will be very high but this is not recommended because it requires a lot of
processor time. The 74% is a standard value that works right in most cases.

384
Lantek Punch module

Regularity

When doing the nesting, the system tries part combinations for taking good advantage of the
space. If the bar is placed with high values, the system will try more part combinations and will
use those on which the space profit is better.

Space between parts or Space between parts offset

With this option the user can specify the space between parts offset in automatic nesting.

Advanced

Nesting priority direction

With this option it is possible to nest the sheet by rows (using horizontal direction) or columns by
(using vertical direction). This option is also available for combinated machines.

Make modules for staggered

Check this box if you want staggered module.

Make multitorch modules

Check this box in case you want to make multitorch modules. The system will create the modules
for the defined number of torches.

Allow mirroring

With this parameter activated, the parts will be placed with symmetries if this is easy for the
nesting. There are some cases that this should not be activated, for example when using plated
sheets on which one side of the part must be always the same.

For each part, the user can choose whether rotations and symmetries are allowed or not. In the
main module, clicking with the right button over the part and choosing properties will show the
part configuration, clicking on more button, the rotations and symmetries possibilities will be
shown.

Although the symmetric are allowed for each part, if the Allow mirroring option is disabled, no
symmetric will be applied on nesting.

Rectangular mode is allowed

385
Lantek Punch module

For improving the speed on the nesting calculations, with this parameter enabled, the system will
treat the almost rectangular parts as rectangular. Those parts are not totally rectangular because
they have small irregularity (maybe rounded corner or chamfer), and the not-rectangular space is
not usable for nesting, if the system takes them as totally rectangular, the nesting will be faster.

In the example, the green space will not be used for placing any geometry because the part will
be considered as totally rectangular.

Corner

The nesting process will start from the selected corner to the opposite direction.

Optimize remnant of the last sheet

The parts will be placed using the minimum X or Y for trying to generate the best remnant
possible. Normally, when there is a big job which includes more than one sheet, this optimization
will be applied to the last sheet of the job.

Exact nesting

Once the nesting has been done, if this parameter is enabled, the system will go part by part
checking the space between parts and making small movements until this space is exact. This
makes the nesting much slower and is not recommended.

Fit every part to one corner of the sheet

Depending on the point chosen on the corner parameter, the system will try to place all the parts
from that sheet corner without taking into account the sheet margin. This can be used for saving
one cut using the side of the sheet. But this is dangerous when there are remnants on the nesting
or it has been made between clamps.

Space between parts (e.g. 8,000)

The minimum distance allowed between parts is the meaning of this parameters.

Rotation possibilities (e.g. 15)

This is the angle step for system to try to place the part on the sheet. For example, with 15
degrees value, the system gets the part and makes tests for placing the part on every 15 degrees
position, in this case 24 tries (24 x 15 = 360 degrees).

Number of nesting methods (e.g. 2)

386
Lantek Punch module

The system uses internally different ways for making the nesting. The number of nesting methods
to try should be configured here. Once all the methods have been tried, the system will use that
on which the sheet usage is better.

Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures (e.g. 50)

The system is going to use holes for placing parts inside if the area is big enough. With this
parameter, the system will not test the holes smaller that the given value for placing parts inside.

Create equal sheets

Using this option the user can generate some equal sheets more when performing the automatic
machining of the active sheet. This parameter allows generating the maximum number of similar
sheets or asking for the desired number of sheets.

Look for regularity and Number of regular tests

Using this method the user can define the automatic nesting: Regular nesting. This option is
activated with a first parameter. A second parameter indicates the intensity of the search for
regular nestings.

This method can be useful for nesting one or few parts in a large amount. With this the user
obtains a uniform nesting in the sheet.

The new method does not substitute the existing ones, but it is used as one more testing in the
search for the best nesting. If the user wants to always use the regular nesting, the user should
activate this new method and put 0 in the parameter " Number of testing methods".

Unitary:

Sheet margins: This dialogue allows you to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the
machine is not going to cut or punch out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the
parts.

Ignore open contours: When making the ONE PART option. with this option on the system will not
use the open contours (Lead ins included) to calculate the necessary sheet for the part.

Create the sheet in database: With this option enabled the sheet will be created in the database
with quantity=0, when creating the sheet for the ONE PART option.

387
Lantek Punch module

Prompt for this data: In this case, when nesting with ONE PART option the system will as for the
sheet margins and if the part needs to be created on the database.

2.8.7.6 Do all - Automatic nesting

This option allows you to configure certain automatic nesting parameters:

Calculation level (e.g. 3)

The system has different nesting methods which can be tried for best sheet performance. By
default, it tries the one which gives the best result most of the times, but the user can set the
system for trying the others because in certain cases they may provide a better sheet usage. It is
important to understand that this will make the whole process slower.

At the end, the system will use the nesting method which obtains the nearest result to the
Maximum efficiency parameter (e.g. 91%).

Look for the best format of sheets

Using this option the user can find the best sheet format for the automatic nesting. This option
finds the best sheet from the store and will nest all the parts in the selected sheet this will use as
many sheet as needed. Or the system will make a pre-nesting with all the available sheets
making an analysis of the sheet usage result for every one. Then will choose those whose usage
is the best.

Look for the best combination of sheets

Using this option finds the best sheet from the store and will nest all the parts, if there are pending
parts, the system will repeat the algorithm and will try to find another sheet which can be defined
form the previous one. this method will be repeated until the subjobs is finished. Or When
executing the Do All option, and if this parameter is enabled, the system will calculate which will
be the best sheet order to use always trying to get the maximum sheet performance with the
maximum number of nested parts possible.

The user can define a minimum efficiency (e.g. 95%) which may comply a sheet for being used.

Look for sheets according to the sheet criteria.

When the Do All option, is used and after performing all the machining, those sheets which
efficiency is not bigger than the configured value will be deleted.

388
Lantek Punch module

Using this option the user can configure if these criteria are useful for the DO All option. If the
user active this parameter, the DO ALL option will take sheets that match with the defined and
stored criteria.

This is also another parameter Minimum efficiency, which is used to configure which is the
minimum efficiency to consider a sheet as good enough.

The user can define a Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet after executing the automatic
machining is not possible to create sheets with the defined minimum efficiency, the system will
generate others with smaller efficiency.

Look for sheets in stored nestings

When this parameter is activated the "Do all" option behaviors changes in such a way that it will
search first for the nestings saved as "Stored nesting". When you activate this parameter, the
system enables some new parameters:

Criteria: To filter the stored nestings that user wish to use. The criteria window is similar to
"Import nestings" window.

Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be used has
machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will be machined again
during the process.

Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it will be
completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined again during the
process.

Minimum efficiency calculation mode

This option allows deciding the way that the efficiency to eliminate the sheets will be calculated.

The available option are:

- Real area: Sum of all real parts area.

-External area: Sum of all external parts area.

-Rectangular area: Sum of all rectangular parts area

-All parts bounding box: Area of all parts bounding box.

389
Lantek Punch module

2.8.7.7 Automatic machining

With this option you can configure the following automatic machining parameters:

2.8.7.7.1 Horizontal exterior punched

2.8.7.7.2 Vertical exterior punched

2.8.7.7.3 Edge punching

2.8.7.7.4 Shearing

2.8.7.7.5 Nested punch configuration

2.8.7.7.6 Component Removal

2.8.7.7.7 Repositions

2.8.7.7.1 Horizontal exterior punched

This option allows the user to configure the parameters related to horizontal external machining.

Always prompt for the tool

Enabling this parameter, the system will show a window for choosing the tool which is going to be
used for horizontal exteriors each time the automatic machining is executed. If it has been
disabled, the system will always use the tool configured in this window.

Punch width (e.g. 5,000)

The width of the tool which is going to be used for horizontal exteriors. When doing the nesting
using common punch technology, the distance between parts will be calculated using the value of
this parameter.

Punch (e.g. RE-20x5)

The chosen tool will be used for all the horizontal exterior contours. All the tools shown here will
have the width specified in the previous parameter.

390
Lantek Punch module

It was only possible to punch the external part with SQ, RE, OB punch. from now on, the system
will punch the external side of the part with any shape if during its definition the user has defined
that the angle can be treated as it were a rectangular punch.

Specify alternative tool

The system will try always to use the default punch. But the part may have geometry for punching
smaller than the configured tool. In this case, that tool can't be used, so the system will try to use
this alternative tool. Usually this tool is small, for example: SQ-5.

It is also possible to select a shape punch (if during its definition the user has defined that the
angle can be treated as if it were a rectangular punch) as alternative punch.

Corner and direction

The starting point corner and the direction that the horizontal exterior punching will follow can be
set up here.

Apply punching in zigzag direction

If this option is enabled, the punching will have a zigzag motion in the previously main direction.

2.8.7.7.2 Vertical exterior punched

This option allows the user to configure the parameters related to vertical exterior machining:

Always prompt for the tool

Enabling this parameter, the system will show a window for choosing the tool which is going to be
used for vertical exteriors each time the automatic machining is executed. If it has been disabled,
the system will always use the tool configured in this window.

Punch width (e.g. 5,000)

The width of the tool which is going to be used for vertical exteriors. When doing the nesting
using common punch technology, the distance between parts will be calculated using the value of
this parameter.

Punch (e.g. RE-20x5)

391
Lantek Punch module

The chosen tool will be used for all the vertical exterior contours. All the tools shown here will
have the width specified in the previous parameter.

It was only possible to punch the external part with SQ, RE, OB punch. from now on, the system
will punch the external side of the part with any shape if during its definition the user has defined
that the angle can be treated as it were a rectangular punch.

Specify alternative tool

The system will try always to use the default punch. But the part may have geometry for punching
smaller than the configured tool. In this case, that tool can't be used, so the system will try to use
this alternative tool. Usually this tool is small, for example: SQ-5.

It is also possible to select a shape punch (if during its definition the user has defined that the
angle can be treated as if it were a rectangular punch) as alternative punch.

Corner and direction

The starting point corner and the direction that the vertical exterior punching will follow can be
configured here.

Apply punching in zig-zag direction

If this option is enabled, the punching will have a zigzag motion in the previously main direction.

2.8.7.7.3 Edge punching

With this option you can configure the punch edging parameters. when the user actives the
edging, it will be executed if all the parts placed on the sheet have punch technology for their
exterior contour. If there is any part with cut technology on its exterior, this option will not be
executed.

This is used for leaving free the edges of the sheet making possible to perform evacuations by
traps. Some traps makes a movement when opening, so for them is necessary not to be sheet
which doesn't allow to make this movement.

392
Lantek Punch module

In the automatic machining for the edge punching now the system allows to make nibblings for
round corners up to the edge. This improvement avoids small imperfections just before the
corners.

Type

From here, the user can choose the different edging types: nibbling, extraction or pocketing.

By nibbling: The system will order to make a nibbling punch for all the piece of sheet which is
between the parts and the sheet edges. In the following example, the edging has been made by
nibbling, and the edges order is: left, right and upper:

By extraction: Depending on the division length, the system makes stops for evacuating the sheet
pieces:

393
Lantek Punch module

By pocketing: The machine will punch with pocket machining all the sheet sides:

Total edging: Possibility to make the “Total edging” of the nesting by punching. This option will
make all the edging of all the sheet by pocketing. The different between this option and the option
“Edging by pocketing”, is that the first one will also machine the gaps between parts.

Always prompt for the tool

If this option is selected, the system will prompt for which punch to use for edging each time this
operation is going to be executed. Disabled, the system will only prompt which punch to use for
the first edge operation and from then on, that punch will be always used.

Punch (e.g. RE-20x10)

Displays the reference for the selected punch. If in the reference appears "< >", this means that
no punch has been selected. The three points button will show the available punches to use, but
only squared, rectangular and oblong punches will appear.

First, second and third edge

This is the order of sides to be edged. The list of choices is: Left, Right or Upper.

Using punch edging by nibbling with the previous configuration, the following example shows how
this process will be done. The numbers represents the punch order:

394
Lantek Punch module

Edging directions

The edging direction along the Y and X axis can be set up here. The system will calculate which
is the best direction if the option of the middle is selected.

Offset (e.g. 1,000)

This distance will be added to the sheet dimensions to ensure that the edges are punched
completely.

Division length (e.g. 200,000)

This parameter will be applied only when using removal edging. Is the distance to be edged
between stops for removal.

2.8.7.7.4 Shearing

With this option you can configure certain shearing parameters.

They are divided into two categories: General and Auxiliar. The following parameters are included
in General section:

GENERAL SECTION:

Direction

Defines the main shearing direction:

Horizontal: First the parts placed on the upper side of the sheet will be sheared.

Vertical: The parts placed at the left side of the sheet will be sheared first.

395
Lantek Punch module

Make the last cutting completely

This parameter defines how the shear is going to cut the parts with X dimension bigger than the
length the shear can cut with just one hit (long parts in X).

Enabled, when a long part in X is sheared, the system will make the first partial shear as long as
possible (this minimizes the number of shear repositions).

For example, if the shear can cut a X 1000 mm in a complete shear, and X 500 mm in a partial-
shear, and the machine has to shear a X 1020mm part:

• The system decides that the needed hits are: Two partial shearing (2 x 500 = 1000 mm),
and a complete one (for the remain 20mm).

• This means that after the two partial-shears, the part remains fix to the sheet with just 20
mm in X (and its width in Y).

This problem can be solved enabling this parameter. The system will calculate depending on the
shear limits and the part lengths, the best hit order. Following with the example, the system will
order to the machine to shear first a 500 mm partial hit, then a 20 mm one, and the last one of
500 mm too, instead of 500+500+20 mm hits. In the first case the part will remain fix to the sheet
with 500 mm in X, and in the second case only with 20 mm.

Minimum length of shearing

With this parameter the minimum shear allowed X and Y dimension is configured (when shearing
small values, the shear does not cut the sheet, only folds it).

If the parts placement is using this minimum distance, the fold problem will only happen when
shearing to the band. In the following example, the shear to the band will only be executed if the
distance pointed as "Distance for shearing the band" is bigger than the value given here:

396
Lantek Punch module

Overlap between parts

Normally the shear can't make a clean-cut, so for this when cutting a part, the length is not
exactly as specified because of this inclined cut. For example, the following part length should be
300 (side view):

But the result is:

With the overlap between parts, the system will adjust the nesting placing the parts overlapped
with a small value to prevent this problem.

Offset concerning punching

The shear has an standard offset respect to the head (see Configure punching machine - Shear -
Offsets (See page XXXX)). But depending on the thickness of the sheet, sometimes there is a
little difference between the punched and the sheared, and for this the punches have a small
displacement respect to the shear. Which depends on the values given in the Offset concerning
punching parameter for X and Y ,these unadjusted distances can be solved.

397
Lantek Punch module

Speed during shearing (e.g. 1,000)

This is the speed of axis positioning for arriving to the shear point.

Before delay

Time in seconds of shear stop before doing the hit once it arrives to the shear point.

After delay

Time in seconds of shear stop once the shear hit has been executed, and before moving the
shear axis again.

Order

With this option user can decide the sheet automatic machining sequence with punching and
shearing operations.

The available sequences in automatic are:

• First punch all and later shear all.

• Punch and shear by zones.

• Punch and shear by parts.

Edging just after repositioning

When the system is working with the shear and makes a reposition movement, the standard way
is to continue punching the pending geometries and then start working with the shear. But if this
parameter is enabled, the machine will make the edging just after the reposition movements
(always if the reposition has been made by shear).

In the following example, the machine makes a reposition movement after the three large parts of
the left has been machined. As can be seen, if the parameter is disabled, the system performs
the remain punch operations just after the reposition movement (figure of the left).

398
Lantek Punch module

But with the parameter enabled, the system will make the edging just after the reposition
movement and before doing any other punching operation, the upper side of the sheet has been
edged:

Fit the work zone to the sheet when loading the shear

Consists on adjust the shear work zone to the left edge of the sheet once the machining has been
executed for avoiding shear repositions (in this case, after punching a punch reposition is
executed)

This parameter must be enabled in the case of the machine is not able to perform repositions
catching the sheet with shear stepper.

Do no execute shearing on edge of sheet

There are sheets whose right and left sides are not used (tailored pre-sheared sheets). In those
sheets there may be parts placed with one of the sides exactly in the side of the sheet. This
parameter configures if these shears will be executed (disabled) or not (enabled).

If is sure that the sheet length is exactly as defined in the system, it is possible to enable this
parameter for avoiding useless shearing hits. If the length is not exactly known, is better to
disable this parameter and perform the shear hits for preventing that the real sheet length is a bit
bigger that the defined (this happens normally).

Outside edge of sheet (e.g. X= 2,000 ; Y=2,000)

399
Lantek Punch module

When shearing an edge of the sheet (for example: eliminating the right side), it is good to hit a
little bit outside of the sheet for being sure the sheet is cut really (the sheet can be a little bit
longer that the nominal dimension). The X defines the displacement from the right edge of the
sheet for executing the shear hit, and the Y defines from the lower side of the sheet.

Note: The displacement of shear hit from the lower side of the sheet should allow not to be
executed out of the Y shear work zone (must be lower that the Y negative shear work zone
offset).

Remnants with maximum dimensions

With this option enabled, the system will insert shear hits for making divisions in the remnants
resulting in smaller portions of sheet. It depends on the values given in the Remnant division
length (e.g. X=500,000 ; Y=500,000).

For example:

Test to avoid hits with form tools

Minimum step and Maximum step:

These parameter are used by the user when testing the shear pusher do not destroy forming
tools.

This test will be only be done when there is semi-pierce and only for the vertical pusher because
if the shear of the part is done with only one operation, it will be the only way to shear it. and the

400
Lantek Punch module

pusher will only have one place to push. If the forming tools are too close to the sheet border and
the pusher has no other place to push, it will always destroy the forming tools.

When there is a semi-shear operation if the vertical pusher destroys forming tools, the system will
try to decrease the position (in X axis) as many steps equals to “Maximum step” value as
necessary to find out a place where the pusher does not destroy the forming tools. If it does not
find any good position it will repeat the process with the Maximum step divided between 2. The
system will go on until a solution is found or until the step is equal or smaller than the “Minimum
step”.

Minimize clamps movements

With this parameter it is possible to define the % of the sheet that must be fixed with the clamps
when optimizing the movement.

AUXILIAR SECTION:

Edging

The Edging operation consists on polish the upper and left margins of the sheet until arriving to
part shearing geometries using shear hits. In the following example, the zones until the red line
have been edged:

If no edging has been selected, each time a part is going to be sheared, the shear will hit
twice: once in the upper side of the part and the second in the left side if they are
necessary:

401
Lantek Punch module

Sheet borders:

Selecting this option will result in less shear hits for removing the shear remnants of the upper
and left margins of the sheet as can be seen on the following figure:

With just two shear hits all the left vertical sheet has been edged. If this has not been chosen, it
will hit four times, one for each part.

As much as possible:

On every situation, the machine is going to shear the maximum possible distance. Every time an
edging operation is executed, the system will check all the sheet and will edge as much as
possible. In the following example, the parts of the left have been sheared, and now the system
must edging the zone with the number 1. Is enough for shearing the upper part to shear until the
number 2, but with this option enabled the system is going to make all the possible edging, in this
case, till the number 3:

402
Lantek Punch module

Instead of edging and shearing all the parts, with this option the machine is going to make all the
edging, and then all the shearing (always as much as possible depending on the nesting).

As much as possible after each part shearing:

As much as possible optimizing the time: With this option the edging operation will be done using
the less time calculated depending on the shear movement speed and the estimated time used
while changing evacuations for remnant or for part

Edging while inside is punched

Normally, the edging operation is executed after all the punch machining. The edging is always
the first operation of the shear. This option is useful for machines where the change between
punching-shearing is fast enough because the system will make the edging at the same time as
punching saving time because of repositions.

For example: In the following sheet, once the shear has been enabled, the work zone is not
enough to cover the sheet margins, so is needed a -X reposition for access to the edging zones:

403
Lantek Punch module

With this parameter enabled, the system can make the punch of all the work zone and then the
edging instead of making reposition and following with the punching:

Finishing the side

For "side of the sheet" the system refers to the right part of the sheet which remains after the
machining has been finished. When this part of sheet is narrow it can cause stuck problems, so it
is better to eliminate it:

404
Lantek Punch module

The elimination of this piece of sheet can be done at the end of the part shearing, or at the same
time as the part are sheared. In this last case, after shearing one of the part of the right, a new hit
is added in the right border of the sheet in the same place as the shearing of the part for erasing
one piece of the sheet side:

Maximum length X (e.g. 100,000): The system will apply shearing for eliminating the side if the
distance between the part and the border of the sheet is equal or smaller than the value given
here.

Minimize the number of shear instructions: The system will calculate the minimum number of
shear hits to use for destroying the side. In the following example, if the parameter is disabled, it
will insert a hit for each part, but if enabled, it will calculate that with two hits is enough:

405
Lantek Punch module

Test if it has been previously punched: With this option it is possible to check if the side has been
punched previously. If the shear has to finish the edge, this parameter will allow to check if the
edge had already been punched before, if so, it will not be sheared, otherwise will be

Shearing the remnant line

With this option the remnant line can be sheared automatically.

Modify the remnant line to shear

With this option the user can modify automatically the remnant line in order to shear it.

Number of box

With this option the user can assign automatically one box to a remnant when multiple remnants
are generated. When two remnants are created, one of them (the bottom strip one – fixed by the
clamps) will be evacuated to the box configured to evacuate the bottom strip, the other will be
evacuated to the box configured by this new parameter.

LOWER BAND:

Shearing to the band

The "band" is defined for the system as the piece of sheet which remains below the sheared
parts:

406
Lantek Punch module

This parameter allows to configure different "shear to the band option:

-During the parts shearing

-After parts shearing (before shearing the lower band)

-After parts shearing (after shearing the lower band)

Depending on the machine type and the kind of work to be done, this band may comply different
conditions:
1. The width should be exactly the same as the defined lower margin of the sheet (for
reusing this remnant)

2. The width should be always lower than a determined value (for being allowed to evacuate
it). In this case, the band may have a minimum width because of the limitations of the
shear for working lower than a defined Y coordinate.
Maximum length in Y (e.g. 100,000): This is the maximum length in Y allowed to be sheared
because the band may be reused if is big enough. In other words: if the distance between the last
part and the lower margin of the sheet is bigger than the value given here, it will be sheared. In
the following example, the given value is 300 mm, but the distance between the last part and the
lower margin is 113 mm:

407
Lantek Punch module

But if the maximum length in Y is, for example, 100, then the system will detect that the resulting
band is bigger and can be reused as remnant, so it will not introduce any shearing instructions:

Shearing to the bottom part: This parameter sets the way the system is going to shear to the
band. If enabling this parameter, the user should configure the minimum Y (e.g. 100,000) and
maximum Y (e.g. 200,000) values.

With these values, the system will make the following when shearing a part which doesn't have
any other one nested below:
• Calculate which part with shear assigned of the sheet has the lower Y shearing
coordinate.

408
Lantek Punch module

• If this value is lower that the specified minimum Y coordinate, the shear will hit in the
coordinate defined on this minimum Y.

• If the value is bigger that the specified maximum Y, the shear will hit in the coordinate
defined on this maximum Y.
This parameter guarantees that the generated lower band is between a height limits regardless of
the defined lower sheet margin (this margin can be 0 also). In the following example, the Y
minimum is 100 and the maximum is 200. The part which is placed lowest in the sheet has an Y
value below 200, for this, the shear hits at Y 200 (the maximum Y):

Shearing the lower band

Enabled, the machine will shear the lower band of the sheet. Normally this band is only sheared
when the sheet length is big and the resulting band can't be evacuated.

Maximum length Y (e.g. 100,000):Although the previous parameter is disabled, if the value given
here is different than 0, the lower band will be sheared at the same time the lower parts are
sheared too whenever the width is smaller than the maximum length Y.

Gather the clamps: For shearing the lower band, the clamps can be get together as maximum as
possible for shear more piece of sheet.

Note: For using this parameter, the clamps must have movement capabilities, it will not work with
fixed clamps.

Extraction of the lower band

409
Lantek Punch module

Enabling this parameter will make the system to introduce a instruction for evacuating the lower
remnant (band) of the sheet after all the machining has been done. Normally this option is
disabled because the band is too wide to be evacuated.

The peak of the shear will be placed in the lower right border of the sheet for making the
evacuation. This point can be modified with offsets for guarantee that the remnant is evacuated
properly.

X offset 10,000 Y offset -10,000

The user should take care with these offsets because the point of the shear maybe go out of the
shear work zone.

It is possible to limit this extraction just to a few cases. Sometimes the length of the band doesn't
allow to be evacuated, for this, the minimum and maximum X will delimit the length, and the
extraction of the lower band will only be executed if the X coordinate of the shear peak is between
these values.

Minimum X -99999,999 Maximum Y 99999,999

Number of box (e.g. 1):The piece of sheet will be evacuated to the number of boxes specified.

The maximum length that a part or a remnant can have, to be evacuated without problems from
the place where the lower band is extracted has to be specified in Maximum length option.

Maximum length
X Y
Part 99999,999 99999,999
Remnant 99999,999 99999,999

REPOSITION:

Reposition data

The system suppose in every moment that if the shear is enabled, it is possible to generate sheet
reposition instructions using as sheet catcher the shear stepper.

410
Lantek Punch module

The following parameters configures how the system will calculate the shear peak reposition point
for making this kind of repositions. A reposition point is correct if comply with two conditions:
1. It can't be lower a minimum Y (to avoid collisions of the stepper with clamps).

2. The stepper must cover enough sheet length for being sure it remains perfectly caught in
the moment of making the reposition.
For solving the first condition, the system provides to give a value to the Minimum Y variable (e.g.
97,000).

When the system generates automatically a reposition with shear it will never place the shear
lower than this value.

The second problem is more complicated. Depending on the placement of the parts on the sheet,
it is possible that the stepper can catch the sheet in X and Y, or only in X or only in Y. There are
three parameters:

XY pushed length (e.g. 500,000): Minimum sheet length caught by the steppers in X and Y
(added) for consider correct a reposition point.

X pushed length (e.g. 400,000): Minimum sheet length in X caught by the steppers for consider a
reposition point correct.

Y pushed length (e.g. 1000,000): Minimum sheet length in Y caught by the steppers for consider
correct a reposition point.

A reposition point will be considered correct if it satisfy anyone of the previous parameter values.

Pushed and shear are independents: Enabling this indicates that the shear stepper can go
down independently of the shear. This is important for finding the reposition point. If the stepper
and the shear go down together, it is necessary to find a reposition point where the shear (when
down the stepper) doesn't cut pending parts. If this parameter is disabled, this security test will
not be made.

PUNCH:

Destroy remnant punching

411
Lantek Punch module

The system will introduce machining for destroying the remnant which result after the shearing
has been executed. For this, the user should configure:

Punch (e.g. SQ-20): This tool will be used for performing the band remnant destroy.

Offset to destroy the remnant (e.g. 0,500 ): This is the distance added to be destroyed too from
the sheet margin and from the lower line of the sheet.

Because this machining will be done between the clamps, it is important to keep them safety
preventing possible collisions with these security distances.

For example:

Shear parts with external of punch

With this parameters user can shear parts with exterior punch technology assigned. The new
options are:

-Never

-Only if there are parts with external of shear

-Always

It will be also possible to define the Maximum length of parts groups and Width length of parts
groups that could have to be sheared in only one shear operation (shear a group of parts).

412
Lantek Punch module

Number of box

With this option the user can define the box number for automatic shearing of parts with external
punch technology ( Group of parts).

Nibble parts that cannot be sheared

If the machine has a 1000 mm shear in X and Y, and on the sheet there is a 1250x1250 part
placed in the lower right side of the sheet, with a 5mm sheet right margin. There is no problem for
shearing the upper and left sides of the sheet (with 2 shear hits in both cases), and also for the
lower side of the sheet (one semi-cut and a complete cut). But in the right side the shear can't
make the 1250mm (the limit is 1000 mm)

For solving this problem, the system provides a way of punching automatically this right side of
the part. This punching will only be executed if this parameter is enabled.

There are some parameters to configure clicking on the three points button:

Only nibble material that cannot be sheared: Enabled, the system will punch only the length that
cannot be sheared, in the example the 250mm (the other 1000 mm will be sheared):

Nibble to edge of sheet: The system can make a nibbling to the upper side of the sheet for
eliminating completely the right margin of the sheet:

413
Lantek Punch module

Only nibble material that cannot be sheared (not selected)

Nibble to edge of sheet (selected)

Nibbling offsets : Adding an offset will make sure the part results totally nibbled. This can be
applied when nibbling a part and when nibbling to the edge of the sheet:

Auxiliary punch: The system will find from all the punches used for making the interior of the
parts, one which allows to make the nibbling (the width should be bigger than the margin and
smaller than the double of the margin). In the case of not found a good one, an external auxiliary
punch can be configured here.

Only punch parts that can be sheared

When there are parts with punching and shearing technology in the sheet, the execution mode in
automatic performs initially all the punches of the sheet (although it has to make repositions), and
then, it will execute all the shearings.

414
Lantek Punch module

But in some cases, the sheet deformations makes this method unable to be applied and it is
needed to go punching and shearing consecutively.

If this parameter is enabled, the system will punch in every reposition those parts that can be
sheared, then they are sheared and the last movement is to make the reposition for repeating the
process.

Note: In some cases the system may not finish all the sheet machining completely. For example
when the parts are big enough that they doesn't fit in the common work zone of punch and shear.

2.8.7.7.5 Nested punch configuration

With this option the user can configure nested punch parameters.

They are divided into three categories: Inside Punching (See page XX), Outside Punching (See
page XX) and Wheel (See page XX).

The common nested punch configuration options are placed in the down side of the window.

OUTSIDE PUNCHING:

Explode punches around clamps / outside of the zone

Depending on the nesting configuration, some of the part's geometries can be placed inside the
clamps zones, or outside the work zone:

415
Lantek Punch module

If these parameters are enabled, the system will decompose the machining making possible to
machine the most geometry length:

Then, after the reposition, all the machining will be done:

If the parameters were disabled, the contours will not be starting machined until all of them are
completely outside of the clamp zone, or completely inside the work zone.

Only parts with the inside punched

Until all the interiors are totally punched, the exterior will not be machined.

Lengthen exterior nibble cycles

The system will lengthen automatically the nibblings used for exteriors. Sometimes, depending on
the nesting and the parts geometries, a small piece of sheet can be left between the parts. This
small piece of sheet is not controlled and can cause problems. In the example, the small squared
pieces of sheet:

416
Lantek Punch module

Only corners: This will be applied only in the nibblings for corners.

Execution mode:

With this option the user can determine the general execution mode while machining. From now
on, the user will be able to decide:
• By grids of equal part: The group of equal parts and with the same angle will be
machined in together consecutively (that was the standard way until now).

• By individual parts: Each part will be machined individually.

It is possible to define a different execution mode for the interiors and exteriors. To force to keep
the criteria of the interior machining, it is necessary not to define a sequence order for the
punches in automatic.

Order

Establish the order to follow for the part's exterior geometry:

By parts: It will completely finish each part's exterior geometry before going to next part.

Direction: From the starting point the machine is going to perform the machining of all the
exteriors in the direction selected :- Horizontal / Vertical.

Predefined: In the configuration window, the beginning / end, and the exterior punching sense
order should be established.

417
Lantek Punch module

Depending on the option selected here, the system is going to reorder all the exterior
machining.

By direction: It defines the main direction to follow for all the exteriors of the sheet, Horizontal or
Vertical, (it doesn't finish each part before going to next one)

With this the user can define the order for the micro-joint punches in the machining sequence:

-Normal sequence. Usual automatic machining sequence.

-At the beginning of the sequence

-At the end of the sequence

-Last punch

Micro-joint punch

This is a special tool which is defined for micro-joints. The value the tool hits are going to be
overlapped should be given.

The CAD module allows to draw the geometries of special punch and save it in the machine tools
database using option:

418
Lantek Punch module

When configuring to use this tool, in the nesting the geometry will be shown as it is going to be
punched:

In this case, the micro-joint is stronger and the risk of part release is smaller:

This parameter has 2 option, the user can select by clicking on the three point button.

1. Micro-joint punch: With this option the user can select the punches by selecting the three point
button.

2. Auxiliary punch: With this option the user can select the auxiliary punches by three point
button.

Overlapping

The distance between the hits for outside punching can be limited here:

419
Lantek Punch module

Maximum (e.g. 0,999): This is the most percent of the tool length which is allowed to overlap in a
previous hit. For example, if this value is 0,5 (50%), when punching, it is allowed that one punch
can overlap a fifty percent of his length. Other example, if there is a 75mm segment and a 50 mm
tool, it will hit twice without problems because the second hit overlaps on the first only a 50%. But
with a 70mm segment, the tool will overlap more than 50% in the second hit.

Limit (e.g. 0,999): If the maximum condition can't be fulfilled, the system will look for another tool
for making the job. In the case of not having proper tools, then the percent given in limit will be
the next value allowed.

Total destruction of remnant

With this option the user can fully destroy the remnant by punching (Execute the external
operations following shearing algorithm)

Punch for the side: With this parameter user can define the punch for the side. this punch will be
used to destroy the side if the parameter "Total destruction of remnant" is on.

Allow punches out of the punching limits:

With this option the user is allowed to determine if is possible to punch out of the part punch
limits. That is to say, if it is possible to punch the microjoints and/or out of the part rectangle. The
available options are:

Always: Even if the microjoints punches are out of the rectangle of the part.

Never: The system will not make punches if there are any micro-joint or if it is out of the part
rectangle.

Only if they don’t come out of the rectangle of the part: Even if any micro-joint is being punched.

Predefined Direction

Group punches of the exterior contour that use the exterior punch: Using this option the user can
punch the exterior contour of a part following the defined direction in one time. This option
punches the external contours and internal contours which are part of the exterior edges of the
part, only if they are punched with the same punches as the external contour.

There are some restrictions or limitations to use this option:

420
Lantek Punch module

a) When repositioning, the system will not allow to have a part in the middle of the reposition. To
avoid this, the user has to configure to machine using maximum rigidity and by parts

b) The part to be punched must be perfectly defined, that is to say, the part must have external
contour and it must be close. To avoid this, it is recommended to verify it before punch it.

c) The exterior contour must not be punched in part mode (CAD) and the interior must be
punched with the same punch that will be used for the exterior contours.

d) The Postprocessor words used between the punches will not be moved with the punches.

e) Once the automatic machining has been made with this option, the user will not be able to re-
order the machining sequence.

Use the extraction punch for nibble when exists excessive overlaps due to the extraction
and Factor

Possibility to “Use the extraction punch for nibble when exists excessive overlaps due to the
extraction” with traps.

If there is a big overlap due to any punch (mainly the evacuation punch) inserted in any slot, and
if this parameter is ON, the total slot will be done with the evacuation punch.

Associated with this parameter, there is a factor which determines if the slot must be perform with
the evacuation punch:

The system will follow this rule: Y < FACTOR * X.

Where

X = number of hits on the slot with the original punch.

Y = number of hits on the slot with the evacuation punch

Use alternative tools for outside around clamps

When the system is working with alternative tools and the punch used for the exterior contour
(horizontal or vertical) can not punch the interior of a part because it is placed in clamp zone, now
it is possible to use alternative punches to save this problem.

INSIDE PUNCHING:

421
Lantek Punch module

All the parameters below this section are referred to the machining of the part's interiors.

Explode punches around clamps / outside of the zone

The meaning of this parameters is the same as explained in the Outside Punching section, but
applied to internal punching operations.

Explode punch macros

With this option the user can explode automatically the punching macros. The available options
are:

Never:

Only if they are bigger than the work zone: The system will explode the macros if the total size of
this macro is bigger than the working zone.

If they enter the clamp zone or come out the work zone: It will only explode the macros if the
parameters, "Explode punches around clamps' and "Explode punches outside of the zone" are
active.

Delete duplicate punches

Sometimes the machining can insert more than one hit with the same punch in the same
coordinates. This option makes the system to analyze all the machining process for this duplicate
punches.

For example, with punches like this:

In the case of this punch is used for the corner of one part, when the nesting of
that part has been done with common cut, then this punch should make the machining of four
different corners of four different parts with just one hit. In this case, they may be one punch hit
assigned for each part instead of just one.

422
Lantek Punch module

Optimize punches on corners

This option will allow minimizing the number of punches in notches or corners shared by more
than one part.

There are two different ways of Execution:

Automatic Execution: Will be necessary to active a parameter on Nested punch configuration and
make automatic machining.

Manual Execution: Modifying the machining. The system will modify the geometry to be punched
instead of the machining. to execute this option the machining must already exits but the corners
or notches to be optimized must not be machined.

Keep the tool after the reposition

Enabled, after the reposition movements, the machine will work with the same tool as it was.
Normally, the automatic machining is ordered to use from the smallest to the biggest tool.

For example, for machining the work zone the machine should use: RD-5, RD-10, RD-15. And
after the reposition, it will use the same tools.

The machining order will change depending on this parameter:

423
Lantek Punch module

RD - 5 RD- 5
RD - 10 RD - 10
RD - 15 RD - 15

Reposition Reposition

RD - 5 RD- 15
RD - 10 RD - 5
RD - 15 RD - 10

Keep the tool after the Keep the tool after the
reposition (disabled) reposition (enabled)

Group internal and external punches of the same punch

This option orders the internal punching sequence leaving as the last internal punch the same
tool as the external punch.

If the external punch is performed with more than one punch, the system can start with the
external punch before finish the internal punch.

Execution mode:

With this option the user can determine the general execution mode while machining. From now
on, the user will be able to decide:
• By grids of equal part: The group of equal parts and with the same angle will be
machined in together consecutively (that was the standard way until now).

• By individual parts: Each part will be machined individually.

It is possible to define a different execution mode for the interiors and exteriors. To force to keep
the criteria of the interior machining, it is necessary not to define a sequence order for the
punches in automatic.

Automatic control of tool ordering

Enabled, the system will maintain the tool order configured in the automatic punching. But if is
disabled, the system will use the tool order used for the part machining in the CAD module.

Use multitools first

424
Lantek Punch module

With this parameter user can define the sequence to machine the internal contours of parts. "Use
multitools first" this new parameter allows to place the punches used in internal contours in
multitools first.

Start point and direction

The Start point is the corner of the sheet to start punching every time the tool changes. If the
selected point is the middle one, it will punch the nearest point to the current position after
changing the tool.

Horizontal or Vertical is the main direction to follow when doing inside punching.

Order

It will configure the order to follow for the tools used for the part's internal machining.

By size: The tools will be used from smallest to biggest.

By turret: The tools will be used depending on the position they take into the turret. The turret
movements for the tool changing will be optimized.

WHEEL:

Order

Normally, the wheel tool should have an special cutting way. Enabling this parameter will make
the system to give this special treatment depending on the following configuration:

Maximum angle

425
Lantek Punch module

This is the maximum angle allowed when the wheel cuts in clamps direction. This tool should
always work from inside to outside (from clamps zone to opposite shed edge) for avoiding sheet
folds.

Prompt this data (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) when the part is cut with wheel

The following five parameters are needed by the postprocessor for making the proper CNC
orders which will manage the wheel tool. With this checkbox enabled, the system will ask for
these data:
1. Piercing the sheet (e.g. 99999,999)

2. Skew offset (e.g. 99999,999)

3. Additional piercing (double pass) (e.g. 99999,999)

4. Parameter of finishing (e.g. 99999,999)

5. Speed mode: With this parameter the user can configure the speed way for wheel tools in
hydraulic machines.
There are two different ways, they are:
1. Norma mode. Limit to 22000 mm / min (866 in/min). Optimum to cut not straight contours

2. High speed mode. Limit to 73000 mm/min (2874 in/min). Recommended only for big arcs
and straight contours.
Outside pre-punching

The system can give a punch hit before start working with the wheel. Depending on the
configuration, the user can define when this hit should be done:

0.- No

1.- Only at the beginning of the exterior of each part

2.- Only at the end of the last exterior of each part

3.- 1 and 2

4.- Only at the beginning of all the exteriors

5.- Only at the end of all the exteriors

6.- 4 and 5 (enabled)

426
Lantek Punch module

Punch (e.g. RE-10x5)

With the previous 4 and 5 options (only at the beginning and end of all the exteriors) and with the
RE-10x5 tool, the result is:

In this case, it hits twice for each exterior segment: at the beginning and at the end.

Wheel Tool Speed

Specify the wheel-tool speed.

T-Shear

Outside punching: Using this parameter the user can configure the pre-punch with a T-Shear
(Wilson tool shear) punch when punching the external contour. The user will be able to configure
the place to pre-punch and the desired punch.
• Mode:
0.- No

1.- Only at the beggining of the exterior of each part

2.- Only at the end of the last exterior of each part

3.- 1 and 2

4.- Only at the beggining of all the exteriors

5.- Only at the end of all the exterior

6.- 4 and 5

• Punch:

427
Lantek Punch module

COMMON NESTED PUNCH CONFIGURATION:

Avoid hits with form tools

Depending on the tool shape (Press form / Semi pierce), when hitting, the sheet may leave raised
in the hit point. It is not convenient to pass over these hit points because if the head is near to the
sheet, it can collide resulting in damages.

For configure properly this option there are two parameters:

Maximum number of rapid tracts (e.g. 50): For avoiding this problematic hits, the system will try to
modify the head movements always limited by the maximum value allowed here. The following is
an example of what tracts means to the system:

Margin with press punches: When avoiding this punches the system will keep always a security
margin (the value of this parameter). This means that the head is not going to pass just very near
these hits.

Punch with form tools last

If this parameter is enabled, the form tools will be used always the last.

It is allowed to exceed the clamps

Disabled, the head will never pass over the clamp zone for security reasons, it will always
surround them. If enabled, the system will not introduce any movement for avoiding the clamp
zone.

Punch the sheet framework

When the cutting process has finalized, the system provides solutions for the sheet leavings. The
Punch the sheet framework option makes the machine to cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical
cuts.

See the help of sheet framework punch configuration.(See page XXXX)

Punch the remnant line

428
Lantek Punch module

With this option enabled, it is possible to configure a default punch to machine the remnant line or
can assign the values by selecting the three point button, the parameters are:

- Always prompt for the tool

- Punch (select by three point button)

- Exact usable remnants: With this option it is possible to evacuate usable remnants after
punching the remnant line. The box number can be assigned to the remnant.

- No

- Only if there is one

- Always

- Number of box

- Put micro-joints & Put an stop: With this options the user can punch the remnant line in
automatic.

- Punch the remnant line at the beginning of the sequence: Using this option the user can
punch the remnant line before punching the parts.

- Punching priority direction: With this option the user can define the priority direction of the
punching in the remnant line (Up=> Down", "Down=> Up" or anyone).

- Punching offset on the edge of sheet: Using this option the user can assign offsets at the
beginning and end of remnant line punching.

Display progress bar

When doing the automatic machining, the system must perform very complicated internal
calculations which may take some time. The user can know what is the system doing on every
moment with the progress bar.

After the automatic machining is over, the system can keep the progress window for a while. Set
the delay in Delay after completion parameter (e.g. 5,000 s).

Clamp movements

IMPORTANT: This feature will not work unless the machine clamps have movement capabilities.

429
Lantek Punch module

For each tool: For each tool, the machine will punch at most and then the system will test if there
are more machining which can be done with this tool moving any of the clamps. If this is possible,
the clamp is moved and the machining is executed. Then it gets the next tool and repeat the
process.

For each tool moving back to its initial position: The process is the same as the previous one, but
in this case each time a clamp is moved and the machining has been done, it goes back to the
initial position.

After punching with all the tools: First the machine uses all the tools for executing the machining,
and after that it will test the remain machining looking if it can be done moving any of the clamps.
If this is possible, the clamp is moved and this machining is executed.

Maximum number of clamp movements before repositioning: This parameter can be only used in
nesting module when the parameter "Clamp movements" has the value: "After punching with all
the tools".

Clamp Movement offset: If this value is 0, the clamp will be moved just to making possible to
make the remain machining, but for security reasons, we can add a distance to this movement.

Minimal overlapping for linear nibble

When doing linear nibblings, the user can configure Minimal overlapping for lineal nibble in
automatic mode with absolute value or using punch size percentage and can define a minimum
and maximum overlapping values.

- % minimal overlapping for internal nibble

- % minimal overlapping for external nibble

Pre-sheared parts management mode

With this option the user can work with unitary part, or when the system detects unitary part on
the sheet, the current managing mode for pre-sheared parts is making the machining as in the
part. No optimizations or clamps movements are managed for example.

This parameter allows apart for this management, another one which will provided a standard
machining, without taking into account whether it is a unitary part or not

Machining order

Order machining

430
Lantek Punch module

In this window the user can configure the automatic machining order. If the selected option is NO,
the system will maintain the punch sequence made in the CAD module.

By parts: The machining order will be calculated for making the minimum number of rapid
movements.

By angles: In this case, the machining order will be established for making the minimum number
of tool rotations.

Put punches in order :Maintaining the previous order machining, the user can choose the order of
the tools.

By path: If the selected order for punches is by path, then the method should be selected:

Path optimization/Method:

Normal: With this method, the system will reorder the machining looking always which is the next
closest hit. For example:

In this case, the order is: The small hole hit, then the closes hit which is the left one of the linear
grid, and the last one is the lower hole of the left.

Optimized: It is not recommended to use this method because the system must make internal
calculations which may take some time. It will make a global study of all the machining process
making an optimized order. Following with the same example as before:

431
Lantek Punch module

It detects that is faster to make the machining in this way: doing the small hole, then the lower
one, and the rest without having to go back.

The number of passes (e.g. 2) parameter configures how many times the system will try to
optimize the order, the higher the value is the slower the process is.

By path in X/By path in Y: Depending on option selected, the system will try to minimize the
number of rapid movements in X or in Y.

By time: This parameter allows defining the necessary time for an autoindex to perform a whole
rotation(3600).

2.8.7.7.6 Component Removal

Allows to assign evacuations to all sheet parts.

There are four methods for evacuating the parts: By lift (See page xx) , using traps (See page
xx), using micro-joints(See page xx) keeping them on the sheet or simply stopping the machine
(See page xx)for making evacuation manually.

Remove part through chute where possible

The machine will use the traps for evacuations if the part lengths allow it. This option will no
appear if the traps of the machine has not been configured on Main elements - Work Centers -
Machine - Configure - Work chutes. (See page XXXX)

TRAP

Move the sheet to the trap: The machine will move the sheet for centering the part on the trap
making easier the evacuation.

432
Lantek Punch module

Move the part after open the trap: Sometimes, the part can't fall intro the trap completely. With
this parameter enabled, the machine will make small movements for making the part fall into the
trap after it has been opened. The distance for these movements should be configured on the
parameter Increment of Work chutes configuration.(See page XXXX)

Fasten the part during the extraction: If this parameter is enabled, then the part to be extracted
will remain fastened during the entire extraction process until the trap opens.

Vacumm & Hammer: If the machine has Vacumm or hammer systems, the system will order to
the machine to use them after opening the trap for making the part evacuation effective.

% of piece inside the trap (e.g. 100,000): The trap will not be open if the part is not placed over it
the percent given here. 100% means that all the part must be over the trap before opening it.

Punch for the final exterior stroke: It is possible to define to use a different tool for the last hit of
the part exterior machining before opening the trap. In the following example, only one hit
remains for machine the complete part. With this option the user can choose to use a different
tool for it, punch, and then open the trap:

Use only when optimizing: The final exterior stroke option will be used only when the optimize
extracts using trap option is enabled.

Optimize: The machine will open the trap and will try to evaluate more than one part keeping the
trap opened.

For example, this is the situation before giving hit and opening the trap:

433
Lantek Punch module

The machine will perform the last hit of the part of the right, then open the trap for evacuating it.
But instead of opening and closing it for each part, it will keep opened and the system will
machine the part of the middle and the part of the left evacuating all of them with the same trap.
After the last hit and evacuation (part of the left), the trap will be closed:

The result is that with one trap open/close, the machine has evaluated three parts.

Optimize extracts using trap:

Yes, with 1 retaining tab: The process will be done using one retaining tab:

Yes, with 2 retaining tab: In this case, two retaining tabs will be used.

434
Lantek Punch module

Direction of optimization: The system will look for the parts placed on the direction configured
here when performing the trap optimization method:

Automatic. (according to the tramp): The system will decide which direction is better to use
depending on the part placement and the trap lengths.

Horizontal: The parts placed in X coordinate will be tested.

Vertical: In this case, the parts placed in Y coordinate.

Horizontal & Vertical: The system will try to optimize both X and Y coordinates from the trap open
order.

Tolerance to optimize extraction (e.g. 1,000): Once the direction of optimization has been
established, the system will look for evacuating parts with the same coordinate, this value is the
difference allowed between the positions. For example, if one part is placed 2 mm below, and the
tolerance is just 1 mm, it is not going to be used for this evacuation.

Minimum length of retaining tab: This is the minimum length allowed for the retaining tab, for the
last hit before the trap is opened.

Reorder extractions for proximity: If the system detects that is better to make the extractions in
different order, if this option is enabled, it will change this order making the process faster.

Removal speed (e.g. 1,000 mm./m.):

This is the machine speed at the moment of evacuating the part. Normally the trap evacuations
should be done at slower speed for avoiding part collision problems, or, for example, when
opening the trap the part may insert below the sheet.

435
Lantek Punch module

Dwell time:

The time the trap will remain opened after the evacuation has been done.

Extract parts where possible by lift:

If the machine has a lift system, it should be used for evacuations. If this option is selected, the
following parameters must be configured:

LIFT

Minimum number of suction cups (e.g. 1): This is the minimum number of suction cups that the lift
should use for extracting the part, if the number of cups is smaller, then it will not be evacuated by
lift.

Move suction cups carriage: There are some lift machines whose suction cups can move from the
lifting carriage for getting some parts or holes better.

Minimum length and Minimum width: Using this parameters the user can limit the minimum size
(dimensions) of a part to be evacuated by LIFT.

Lift has priority: With this option the user can prioritize evacuations by LIFT on evacuations by
TRAP.

How to configure carriage movement (See page XXXX)

Apply micro-joints to parts

The system will apply automatically micro-joints as evacuation method depending on the value
given on the following parameters:

Punch for the final exterior stroke

Using this option the user will be able to select a different punch for the last punch stroke before a
LIFT evacuation (Similar to the existing option for TRAP evacuations).

When this punch is defined, the system will display the overlap value for this punch (This value
will be the same used for TRAP evacuations).

Prioritize suction cups depending on center of gravity

Using this option the user can prioritize the evacuation of a part by:

436
Lantek Punch module

The number of suction cups used to perform the evacuation.

Select the best suction cups to get the best gravity center of the part to be evacuated.

Prioritize

With this parameter the user can prioritize the Lift point selection in the horizontal or vertical
exteriors. This parameter “Prioritize”, allows to choose between three options:

No: The selection of the evacuation point depends on the maximum number of suction cups that
this point allows using and on the best gravity center obtained from the utilized suction cups.

Horizontal: If there is any point in a horizontal exterior lateral where it is possible to place a lift
point, it will be selected before any point of a exterior vertical. Among the possible horizontal
points, the system selects the one which uses the most number of suction cups or the best
gravity center (depending on “The number of active suction cups has higher priority than the
gravity center” parameter).

Vertical: Opposite case.

Tolerance to distance between centers of gravity:

With this option the user can define the minimum distance from the gravity center of the part to
the gravity center of the suction cups so that the evacuation point is considered as valid.

MICROJOINTS

The width of microjoints is thickness Dependent: If this parameter, is enabled, there are two
values to configure:
1. Factor of thickness for corner microjoints (e.g. 1,000)
2. Factor of thickness for middle microjoints (e.g. 1,000)
The system will calculate the width of the microjoints multiplying the value given here and the
thickness of the sheet.

But if the width of micro-joint is not thickness dependant (disabled), then the fix value will be
taken from the parameter Width value of micro-joint (e.g. 1,000)

If this parameter, the width of microjoints is thickness Dependent is disabled, there are two
values to configure:

1. Width Value of middle micro-joints.

437
Lantek Punch module

2. Width value of corner micro-joints.

Maximum length without microjoints (e.g. 100,000): This is the maximum distance allowed to part
contours without micro-joints.

Use a machine stop to remove parts

In this case, the machine will be stopped after every part machining waiting for manual
evacuation.

Use micro-joint punches:

If this parameter is enabled, the user can configure the values for Micro-joints punch by selecting

three point button ( ). For automatic machining for external contours when microjoints are
needed.

Micro-joints punch and Auxiliary punch: It is Possible to configure which punches will be used to
make the microjoints when making evacuations with microjoints. If any of these punches has
been defined, and/or the parameter to active this option is off, the system will use the same
punch as the one used for the external contour.

STOP

Zone:

Depending on the punching machine type (how the clamps, the head... are placed) it
will be better to perform the last hit in a specific zone making easier the manual evacuation. If the
selected option is the '?', the meaning is that the system will not try to make the last hit in a
specific zone.

Lengthen exterior nibble cycle

With this option the user can do automatic evacuations to lengthen exterior nibble cycles. This
parameter will be only available in STOP, LIFT, or TRAP evacuations. only in Automatic
machining.

438
Lantek Punch module

2.8.7.7.7 Reposition

If the machine is working with a sheet which is longer that the work zone, the machine must
perform a reposition movement in order to process the machining of the parts placed outside the
work zone.

There are three types of repositions: with Pistons, using Head, or both. The parameters to
configure depends on the chosen type.

Type of reposition: Pistons

This type of reposition must be chosen if the machine have hold down cylinders for supporting the
sheet during repositioning of the clamps. There are some parameters to fill about pistons:

Number of pistons (e.g. 2): This value is the number of pistons of the machine.

Piston coordinates: The X and Y position of each piston, and the radius values must be
configured here. These value are measured from the cut/punch head center.

Coordinates
X Y Radius
Piston - -15,000 20,000
1 320,000
Piston 320,000 -15,000 20,000
2

The X coordinate of the hold down position is calculated based on the amount of repositioning
required, the Y position can be controlled in a number of different ways:

When doing a reposition, the pistons will be placed the Y distance from the upper
side of the sheet. For example: if the work zone has a limit of 1250 mm, the pistons will be
placed in Y=1250-100=1150.

If the center position has been selected, the system will place the pistons at the
same Y coordinate as the cutting head position before the reposition movement.

439
Lantek Punch module

The pistons will be placed in the Y position starting from the bottom side of the sheet in this
case. Following with the example, now the Y coordinate for the pistons will be 0+150=150mm.

the position of reposition is fixed / Y (e.g. 300,000): All the previous values are only
for Automatic Machining. But if the reposition is added manually, the Y position will be taken from
here.

Look for a correct Y position of reposition: The system will check for an appropriate position of the
Y axis. It is important to hold the sheet strongly while the clamps are relocated, for this, the
pistons must be in contact with the sheet and not placed over a previously cut hole.

If the user configures upper and lower margin and an increment, the system will scan between
these limits for a valid position, altering the Y value each time by the stated until a suitable
position is found.

The following three options are only for punching machines:

Punch reposition taking into consideration the shear work zone: When executing punching
machining in the case of doing repositions, when doing the last one the system will consider the
shear work zone optimizing the reposition.

Lower the pistons with the shear & Y minimum position: When executing the reposition, the shear
can go down and trap the sheet. With this option enabled, the system will lower the pistons for
catching the sheet too.

Lower the shear with the pistons: When executing a reposition, the machine can lower the shear
for helping in the sheet
catch.

Type of reposition: Head

The head will go down to catch the sheet for performing the reposition. The system needs to
know the Head radius (e.g. 100,000).

The Y position is configured like in the reposition by pistons.

Type of reposition: Both of them

440
Lantek Punch module

In some machines, the reposition can be done with pistons and with head at the same time. The
system provides management of this way. The parameters to configure are all of pistons, the
head radius, and how the Y position of pistons and of head will be controlled.

Retract value in Y (e.g. 2,000)

This is the back off distance in Y when opening the clamps. It is applied before the X carriage is
moved providing a clearance between the clamps and the edge of the sheet.

Advance value in Y (e.g. 1,000)

This is the value that the Y axis moves back after repositioning. Normally is the same as retract
value, but sometimes is smaller to prevent the sheet being "nudged" by the work clamps if the
edge of the sheet is uneven.

Speed in X (e.g. 20000,000 mm./m.)

The feed rate in X of the machine when moving the sheet during repositioning.

Speed in Y (e.g. 20000,000 mm./m.)

The feed rate applied to the back off move.

Fixed value of repositions and value

With this option enabled, the user can specify the distance to move in a reposition. If this value is
bigger than the work zone, the system will not do any reposition.

X position of reposition

Using this parameter the user is allowed to define the sheet fixture point during the automatic
repositions. It is only valid when the sheet is fixed by the head or the pistons.

This parameter has two options, they are

- Fit to the edge of active work zone.

- Sheet center

Test sheet clamps in holes when repositioning

When doing repositions, sometimes the clamps are placed inside holes resulting in a bad sheet
catch. With this parameter enabled, the system will test each clamp position before placing it on

441
Lantek Punch module

the sheet. The distance increment for testing must be set up in Increment of search of correct
position option (e.g. 5,000).

The system will not allow reposition movements if there is not a Minimum number of clamps
catching the sheet properly.

Maximum number of reposition (e.g. 100) & Maximum increment of reposition (e.g.
99999.999)

The user can specify the number repositions to do while machining and the maximum length for
any reposition

The machining will be stopped after reaching the number in maximum number of reposition
instead of making more repositions.

Once the reposition type and all the parameters are configured, the user can choose two
reposition strategies clicking on Strategy button.

Sheet hold mode when displacing movable clamps

Using this option the user can fix the sheet with the turret head or with the pistons while moving
clamps.

This option consists of three parameters, they are: No hold, Pistons, Head.

REPOSITION STRATEGY

Mode

This option consists of three different reposition types:

Normal: Standard one for the machine.

Home: This method will perform the repositions as the standard way but at the end of the
machining the machine will make another reposition to go back to the home position.

442
Lantek Punch module

First: This method is the opposite of the standard method. it will make the reposition at the
beginning, cut the small side first.

Strategy

Normal: The system will perform machining of all the work zone, and the rest after the reposition.

Maximum rigidity: The system will perform one small percent of the work zone, and the rest after
the reposition.

This strategy can be used in two ways:

By parts & Offset: If there is any part in both the first and the second zone, the system will make
the machining of the part at most depending on the work zone (violet color):

443
Lantek Punch module

The reposition is going to start after the situation of the figure.

In the example, there are three small parts and one larger part that is between the two zones.
The system will finish the three small parts because the work zone allows it, and is going to
machine all the geometries of the larger part that the work zone allow.

By length & Offset: The system is going to machine all the geometries that are in the first zone,
then make the reposition, and finish. It is not going to take care of the parts:

444
Lantek Punch module

In the figure, the reposition has just finish. The system will machine only the length of the zone 1,
make the reposition, and finish the sheet.

The offset parameter in both modes is the distance from the limit of the zone 1 that the system
will take as zone 1 for making the reposition. In other words: is the distance of the zone 2 which is
going to be machined before making the reposition:

2.8.7.8 Part List Table

There are different options to Configured by the user. Also these fields can be configured from
the Part list.

The available fields to visualize are: Quantity, Dimensions, Part identifier 1, Part identifier 2, Part
identifier 3, Auxiliar part identifier 1, Auxiliar part identifier 2, Auxiliar part identifier 3, Auxiliar part
identifier 4, Auxiliar part identifier 5, Area, Labor ticket, Order, Product, Priority, Pending quantity,
Nested quantity.

The rows can be ordered by any column (by clicking on the header of the column) and this
ordination will be stored even of the user changes from list mode to large icons mode. In other
words, if after arranging the rows by any of the columns in list mode, the user comes back to the
large icon mode, the parts will be shown in the same order they had in the table.

445
Lantek Punch module

2.8.8 Customize

Toolbars

In this window there are different elements which allows to define or change the toolbars:

Bar = (e.g. New)

The configuration of the toolbar chosen here will be shown in the screen allowing to change it. If
the user selects the <New...>, then the system will prompt for the name and will create a new
toolbar.

For modification or creation of new toolbars, follow the steps below

1. Select the menu from where the option will be got (the list of the right side):
Menu
Parts
Geometry
Edit
Machining
Technology
View
Simulation
Utilities
Applications
?

2. The option list will change showing those from the selected menu:
Options
New
Open
Save
Save as
Save by parts
Save all
.........................
Preview
Print....
Exit

3. Select the proper options and click on the arrow button, they will be included into the new
toolbar:
Options Bar
New... Parts\New...
Parts\Open
Open Parts\Save

446
Lantek Punch module

Save Parts\Save as
Save as
Save by parts >
Save all
.......................
Preview
Print....
Exit

4. It is also possible to delete commands from the bar, for that select the option you want to
delete from the bar panel and click the Delete button.
5. The toolbar can have as many options are needed and they can be divided using the
Separator button:
Bar >Separator> Bar

Parts\New... Parts\New...
Parts\Open Parts\Open
Parts\Save Parts\Save
Parts\Save as Parts\Save
Parts\Save all as
Parts\Print Parts\Save
Parts\Preview all
Edit/Undo ......................
View\XY Axis Parts\Print
View\Zoom all Parts\Preview
......................
Edit/Undo
View\XY Axis

The new toolbar will include a vertical line dividing the options as configured:

Hide options

In this window there is a possibility to hide options and sub-options from the toolbars and menus.

There are 3 different options:

-Basic: Hides a predefined group of options.

-Advanced: Unhides all the options.

-Customized: The user can define which options will be hidden. This contains other four options
they are: Current machine, Machine of same type, All machine and Hide options in both modules.

447
Lantek Punch module

Shortcut keys

The user can assign shortcut keys to any option or sub option. The shortcuts can consist on a
single key or on a combination of the keys Ctrl, Alt or Shift followed by any character.

2.9 Application

2.9.1 Assign paletization suction cups

2.9.2 Assign download point to pallet

2.9.3 Machining of a part with 2 torches

2.9.4 Common cut with multitorch

2.9.5 Parts evacuation by lift after machining

2.9.6 Pallet

2.9.1 Assign paletization suction cups

With this the user can assign suction cups to parts to be palletized. This application is managed
by 4 commands:

Automatic: Automatic assignment of suction cups.

Modify: Allows to modify the assignment manually.

Delete: Deletes all the suction cups assigned by Automatic and Modify commands.

Configure: Allows to define the configurations to be used while executing the automatic command

2.9.2 Assign download point to pallet

Using this option the user can fix a predefined stacking position to a part Option Protected-Pallet
information + Shear + Lift.

448
Lantek Punch module

This option will display for each part of the sheet, the position, the stacking position and
information to recognize if it is a symmetry of the original part. The system will ask for the
stacking position. This option only works for sheared parts.

2.9.3 Avoid to destroy from tool hits when punching the

outside

Using this option the user can reorder the application of the machining and the pusher will not
destroy the form operations while punching the exterior. The forming tools will be performed after
the exterior.

This parameter is the protected option.

2.9.4 Pallet

2.10 ?

2.10.1 Contents

2.10.2 Context

2.10.3 User editor

2.10.4 About

2.10.1 Contents

This document contains information and help about the CAD/CAM sections of the system.
Please, select the desired section for getting help:

Introduction

System units

Work center

CAM

449
Lantek Punch module

2.10.2 Context

Use this button to get help on any program option. Simply push the button and then click on the
program aspect you would like help with, either a button or a menu option. If the aspect indicated
by the user is not specifically covered in the help files the system will display an error message.

2.10.3 User editor

This option enables you to access a file editor to edit any text file, for example CNC files
generated by the system.

2.10.4 About

This option informs you of the version of the program, the license and series number and the
memory available.

450